JP7637099B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine equipped with a molded product.

Conventionally, gaming machines equipped with molded parts are known (see Patent Document 1). In this gaming machine, the molded parts are provided with operation buttons. In particular, the operation buttons have extrusion pin marks arranged on the lower end surface of the body.

JP 2021-122654 A

However, in conventional gaming machines, there is a risk that pin marks placed on the molded product may interfere with other components.
An object of the present invention is to prevent a situation in which pin marks placed on a molded product interfere with other members.

In order to achieve the above-mentioned object, the gaming machine of the first invention comprises a rail for guiding a gaming ball, and a base member for supporting said rail, said base member being a molded product, said rail being supported by a guide surface of said base member, and pin marks of an extrusion pin being arranged inside a recess provided at a position avoiding said guide surface.
In the gaming machine according to the first aspect of the present invention, no pin marks are arranged on the guide surface that supports the rail, which makes it possible to prevent the pin marks arranged on the base member from interfering with the rail.
Here, the rail corresponds to an outer rail 530 described later. The base member corresponds to a rail base 520 described later. The guide surface corresponds to a guide surface 521 described later. The pin mark corresponds to a pin mark PS described later.

The present invention makes it possible to prevent pin marks placed on a molded product from interfering with other components.

1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the front of the game board, and diagrammatically illustrates parts particularly necessary for explanation. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a control system of a pachinko machine. 2 is an address map of a memory area used by the CPU 210. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the contents of the game state. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the winning probabilities for various lotteries. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the types of winnings in various lotteries. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the variation time of special symbols selected and set during each game state. A diagram showing the transition of game states. 13 is a flowchart showing a CPU initialization process. 10 is a flowchart showing an initialization process when power is restored. 13 is a flowchart showing a main loop process. 13 is a flowchart showing a save process at the time of power interruption. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a dynamic port output process. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance display device output process. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting-related process. 13 is a flowchart showing a switch management process. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal starting ball detection process. This is a flowchart showing the starting ball detection process for Special Figure 1. This is a flowchart showing the starting ball detection process for Special Chart 2. 13 is a flowchart showing a special pattern random number acquisition process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special game management process. A flowchart showing special game management processing for special chart 2. A flowchart showing the special game management processing of Special Chart 1. 13 is a flowchart showing the special game management process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing the special chart change waiting process. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during special chart change. A flowchart showing processing while a special chart is stopped. A flowchart showing the processing before the large prize opening is opened. A flowchart showing the large prize opening control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special electric service opening/closing switching process. A flowchart showing the large prize opening closure validity process. A flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the large prize opening. This is a flowchart showing the processing before the large prize opening is opened when a small win occurs. A flowchart showing the control process for opening the large prize opening when a small win occurs. 13 is a flowchart showing a special electric service opening/closing switching process. A flowchart showing the effective process of closing the large prize opening when a small win occurs. A flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the large prize opening when a small win occurs. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal game management process. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal game management process. A flowchart showing the normal game management processing when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of waiting for a change in the map. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during normal map changes. 13 is a flowchart showing processing during normal map stop. This is a flowchart showing the processing before opening normal electric devices. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature release control process. 13 is a flowchart showing normal electric utility opening and closing switching processing. This is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature closure activation process. This is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of normal electric device opening. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance display device control process. 13 is a flowchart showing a sub timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart showing a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a hold command receiving process. 13 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead command receiving process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable command receiving process. 13 is a flowchart showing a stop command receiving process. 13 is a flowchart showing an opening command receiving process. 13 is an exploded oblique view of the game ball payout device 440. FIG. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the rear side of a cover member 470 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing the rear side of a cover member 470 according to a second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a rear view of the cover member 470 according to the third embodiment. 2 is an oblique view showing the front side of the game board 11. FIG. 13 is a perspective view showing the state in which the outer rail 530 is removed from the rail base 520. FIG. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of a decorative member 700. A diagram showing the configuration of the ball return prevention mechanism 14. 2 is a diagram showing a rotating member 14a in a first state. FIG. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing a rotating member 14a in a second state. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a rotating member 14a in a third state.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In this embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1.
(Overall configuration of pachinko machine 1)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the overall configuration of a pachinko machine.
The pachinko machine 1 is composed of an outer frame unit 2, an inner frame unit 3, an integrated door unit 4, and a game board unit 10.
The outer frame unit 2, the inner frame unit 3, and the integrated door unit 4 are fixed to one another via a hinge mechanism, which allows the inner frame unit 3 to be opened and closed relative to the outer frame unit 2. The integrated door unit 4 can be opened and closed relative to both the inner frame unit 3 and the outer frame unit 2.

The outer frame unit 2 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (outer frame). The outer frame of the outer frame unit 2 is fixed to an island facility of an amusement facility.
The inner frame unit 3 is configured to include a rectangular frame body (inner frame). The inner frame unit 3 is disposed inside the outer frame unit 2.
The integrated door unit 4 is formed in a rectangular door shape and has a transparent plate 4a disposed in the approximate center, a decorative portion 4b disposed around the transparent plate 4a, a receiving tray unit 5 disposed below the transparent plate 4a, and a launch handle 6 disposed to the side of the receiving tray unit 5.
The transparent plate 4a is formed in a flat plate shape from a transparent material such as resin or glass. The decorative portion 4b is formed from a transparent or translucent resin material and has a shape that bulges forward. At each corner on the upper side of the decorative portion 4b, a sound hole 4c is provided in which a speaker 22 (see FIG. 3) is disposed. Each sound hole 4c is provided with a plurality of sound holes that pass through the sound output by the speaker 22. In addition, a frame lamp 20 (see FIG. 3) is disposed on the decorative portion 4b. The frame lamp 20 is configured to include a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEDs) that are driven by dynamic lighting control.

The tray unit 5 has a tray 5a for receiving game balls (loan balls and prize balls), and an effect button 5b and a rotary selector 5c disposed in front of the tray 5a.
The performance button 5b is formed in a generally cylindrical shape and is disposed so as to protrude upward from the tray unit 5. The performance button 5b can be pressed (pushed downward) by the player. A first operation detection switch 24 (see FIG. 3) that detects the pressing of the performance button 5b is disposed inside the tray unit 5. The first operation detection switch 24 outputs a first operation signal to the performance control board 300 (see FIG. 3) every time the performance button 5b is pressed.
The rotary selector 5c (so-called "jog dial") is formed in a roughly cylindrical shape and is disposed so as to surround the performance button 5b. The rotary selector 5c can be rotated by the player (rotated around the cylindrical axis). A second operation detection switch 25 (see FIG. 3) that detects the rotation operation of the rotary selector 5c is disposed inside the receiving tray unit 5. The second operation detection switch 25 outputs a second operation signal to the performance control board 300 each time the rotary selector 5c is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 60°).

A loan operation unit 7 is disposed on the upper surface of the tray unit 5. The loan operation unit 7 has a ball loan button 7a, a return button 7b, and a degree display device 7c.
Here, the pachinko machine 1 is communicatively connected to a CR unit (not shown) that can read and update information recorded on a prepaid card. When a prepaid card (not shown) is inserted into the CR unit, the remaining number of points of the valuable medium recorded on the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit is displayed on the point display device 7c.
In addition, when the ball loan button 7a is operated while the prepaid card is inserted in the CR unit, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the tray 5a. At this time, the remaining number of points of the valuable medium recorded in the prepaid card is updated according to the number of game balls paid out, and the updated remaining number of points of the valuable medium is displayed on the point display device 7c.
Furthermore, when the return button 7b is operated while a prepaid card with remaining points of the valuable medium is inserted in the CR unit, the prepaid card is returned from the CR unit.
Here, the prepaid card may be, for example, a magnetic storage medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, or the like.
The launch handle 6 can be rotated by the player. A launch volume 410 (see FIG. 3) is disposed inside the launch handle 6 to detect the angle at which the launch handle 6 is rotated. The launch volume 410 outputs a detection signal corresponding to the detected angle to the payout control board 400 (see FIG. 3).

(Configuration of game board unit 10)
Next, the configuration of the game board unit 10 will be described.
FIG. 2 shows the front of the game board, and is a schematic diagram showing parts particularly necessary for explanation.
The game board unit 10 is supported by the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the game board unit 10 is attached to the inside of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3. As a result, the game board unit 10 is disposed on the rear side of the integrated door unit 4. The player can view the game board 11 (play area 30) described later through the transparent plate 4a. In this embodiment, the game area 30 described later is configured between the rear side of the transparent plate 4a and the front side of the game board 11.
As shown in Figure 2, the game board unit 10 comprises a set board (not shown), a game board 11 attached to the set board, and various presentation devices (main image display device 31, sub image display device 32, movable body unit, etc.) attached to the set board.
The set plate is formed in a box shape with an open front side, and an opening formed as a through hole is provided in the approximate center of the rear plate of the set plate.
The game board 11 is attached to the front side of the set plate. The game board 11 is made of resin and formed into a flat plate. An opening (not shown) consisting of a through hole is provided in the approximate center of the game board 11. The player can view the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 through the opening provided in the game board 11 and the opening provided in the set plate.
A game area 30 is formed around the opening on the front side of the game board 11, along which game balls flow down when the launch handle 6 is rotated. In the game area 30, a left side path formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right side path formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 are configured as paths along which the game balls flow down.
Furthermore, a board lamp 21 (see FIG. 3) is provided in the play area 30 of the game board 11. The board lamp 21 includes a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEDs) that are driven by dynamic lighting control.

The main image display device 31 is attached to the rear side of the set board. The main image display device 31 is composed of a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display, a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) display, etc. The main image display device 31 has a display screen 31a capable of displaying a performance image.
The display screen 31a can be configured to have a performance pattern display area A (not shown) corresponding to the special pattern 1 display device (first special pattern) described below, and a performance pattern display area B (not shown) corresponding to the special pattern 2 display device (second special pattern) described below.
Each of the performance pattern display areas A and B is composed of three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 in which a first performance pattern z1 (not shown) is displayed, and one second performance pattern display area a4 in which a second performance pattern z2 (not shown) is displayed.
The first performance symbol z1 is composed of identification information (symbols) such as numbers, letters, symbols, characters, etc. In each of the first performance symbol display areas a1 to a3, it is possible to perform a variable display and a stationary display of the first performance symbol z1. The second performance symbol z2 is composed of color bars. In the second performance symbol display area a4, it is possible to perform a variable display and a stationary display of the second performance symbol z2.
The changing display of the performance patterns z1 and z2 refers to a display in which the first performance pattern z1 is moved (scrolled) in each of the first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3, and the type of the second performance pattern z2 displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 is changed (the color represented by the color bar is changed sequentially).
The stopped display of the performance patterns z1 and z2 refers to a display in which one type of first performance pattern z1 is stopped at the lottery result display position of each of the first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3, and one type of second performance pattern z2 is displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 (the color bar shows a specified color).
Then, in the performance pattern display area A, the result of the first special pattern lottery is displayed by a combination of the first performance pattern z1 displayed in a stopped state in the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 and the second performance pattern z2 displayed in a stopped state in the second performance pattern display area a4.
In addition, in the performance pattern display area B, the result of the second special pattern lottery is displayed by a combination of the first performance pattern z1 displayed in a stopped state in the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 and the second performance pattern z2 displayed in a stopped state in the second performance pattern display area a4.
In addition, the display screen 31a can be configured with reserved symbol display areas b1, b2 (not shown) in which a reserved symbol h (not shown) is displayed.
The reserved symbol display area b1 displays a reserved symbol h corresponding to the special symbol 1 game information described later. The reserved symbol display area b2 displays a reserved symbol h corresponding to the special symbol 2 game information described later.

The sub-image display device 32 is disposed at a position on the front side of the main image display device 31 .
The sub-image display device 32 is configured by a variable display device such as a liquid crystal display, a CRT display, etc. The sub-image display device 32 has a display screen 32a capable of displaying a performance image.
The sub-image display device 32 can be displaced (moved) in the vertical direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Specifically, the sub-image display device 32 can be displaced within a predetermined range including an origin position (see FIG. 2) and a performance position (not shown) below the origin position.
The sub-image display device 32 disposed (displaced) at the origin position is disposed above the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and does not cover the display screen 31a. On the other hand, the sub-image display device 32 disposed (displaced) at the performance position is disposed in front of the display screen 31a of the main image display device 31 and covers a part of the display screen 31a.

The left side path is provided with a first starting opening 51. The first starting opening 51 is an entry opening (a so-called "navel") that opens upward, and allows game balls to enter at all times. The first starting opening 51 allows game balls flowing down the left side path to enter (game balls flowing down the right side path cannot enter).
A special symbol 1 start port switch 101 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the first start port 51. The special symbol 1 start port switch 101 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the first start port 51 (entry of a game ball into the first start port 51). The main control board 200 executes a first special symbol lottery in response to input of the detection signal from the special symbol 1 start port switch 101.
To the left of the first starting opening 51 on the left side path, there are provided an upper left other winning opening 57a, a middle left other winning opening 57b, and a lower left other winning opening 57c. Each of the other winning openings 57a to 57c is an entry opening that opens upward and allows game balls to enter at all times. Each of the other winning openings 57a to 57c allows game balls that flow down the left side path to enter (game balls that flow down the right side path cannot enter).
A left winning hole switch 106 (see FIG. 3) is disposed on the game board 11. The left winning hole switch 106 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the other winning holes 57a to 57c (entry of a game ball into the other winning holes 57a to 57c). In response to the input of the detection signal from the left winning hole switch 106, the main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a payout operation of the prize ball.

At the most upstream of the right-side path, a start gate 41 is provided. The start gate 41 is formed so that game balls can always pass through it. The start gate 41 allows game balls flowing down the right-side path to pass through (but does not allow game balls flowing down the left-side path to pass through it).
A gate switch 104 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the start gate 41. The gate switch 104 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a gaming ball passing through the start gate 41 (passage of the start gate 41 by a gaming ball). The main control board 200 executes a normal symbol lottery in response to input of the detection signal from the gate switch 104.
A third starting port 53 is provided downstream of the starting gate 41 on the right path. The third starting port 53 is provided with a normal electric device (normal electric device) 53a that can be displaced between a closed state that prevents a game ball from entering the third starting port 53 and an open state that allows a game ball to enter the third starting port 53.
The normal electric role 53a is opened and closed by a normal electric role solenoid 64 (see FIG. 3). The third starting hole 53 is normally closed so that the game ball cannot enter, but when the normal symbol lottery is won, the normal electric role 53a is opened so that the game ball can enter. The third starting hole 53 allows the game ball flowing down the right path to enter (but does not allow the game ball flowing down the left path to enter).
A second special symbol 2 start port switch 102b (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the third start port 53. The second special symbol 2 start port switch 102b outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the third start port 53 (entry of a game ball into the third start port 53). The main control board 200 executes a second special symbol lottery in response to input of a detection signal from the second special symbol 2 start port switch 102b.

A first large prize opening 54 is provided downstream of the third starting opening 53 on the right path. The first large prize opening 54 is provided with a first special electric device (special electric device) 54a that can be displaced between a closed state that makes it impossible for game balls to enter the first large prize opening 54 and an open state that makes it possible for game balls to enter the first large prize opening 54.
The first special electric device 54a is opened and closed by the first large prize opening solenoid 65a (see FIG. 3). Normally, the first special electric device 54a is closed and the first large prize opening 54 is not capable of receiving game balls, but when a "big win" is won by the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery), the first special electric device 54a is opened and the game balls can enter. The first large prize opening 54 is capable of receiving game balls flowing down the right path (but not game balls flowing down the left path).
A first count switch 103a (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the first large prize opening 54. The first count switch 103a outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the first large prize opening 54 (entry of a game ball into the first large prize opening 54). The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a payout operation of prize balls in response to input of the detection signal from the first count switch 103a.
In addition, within the first large prize opening 54, there are provided a V area (not shown), a discharge area (not shown), and a distribution means (not shown) that distributes a game ball that enters the first large prize opening 54 to one of the V area and the discharge area.
A V-area switch 110 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the V-area. The V-area switch 110 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the V-area (passage of the V-area by a game ball). In response to input of the detection signal from the V-area switch 110, the main control board 200 sets "1" in a V winning flag area of a RAM 230 (described later).
The distribution means is capable of being displaced between a V-passing state in which the game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 54 is distributed to the V region, and a non-V-passing state in which the game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 54 is distributed to the discharge region.
That is, when the distribution means is displaced to the V-passing state, all game balls that enter the first large winning opening 54 are distributed to the V region. This makes it impossible for game balls that enter the first large winning opening 54 to pass through the discharge region.
On the other hand, when the distribution means is displaced to the non-V passing state, all game balls that enter the first large winning opening 54 are distributed to the discharge area. This makes it impossible for game balls that enter the first large winning opening 54 to pass through the V area.
The distribution means is displaced by a V-zone solenoid 66 (see FIG. 3).
The game ball that enters the first big winning opening 54 is first detected by the first count switch 103a, then is sorted by the sorting means into one of the V area and the discharge area, and after passing through that area, is discharged into the discharge path. At this time, the game ball sorted into the V area is detected by the V area switch 110.

The second start opening 52 is provided downstream of the first big prize opening 54 on the right side path. The second start opening 52 is an entry opening (a so-called "navel") that opens upward, and game balls can enter at any time. The second start opening 52 allows game balls flowing down the right side path to enter (game balls flowing down the left side path cannot enter).
A first special symbol 2 start port switch 102a (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the second start port 52. The first special symbol 2 start port switch 102a outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball entering the second start port 52 (entry of a game ball into the second start port 52). The main control board 200 executes a second special symbol lottery in response to input of a detection signal from the first special symbol 2 start port switch 102a.
A second large prize opening 55 is provided downstream of the second starting opening 52 on the right path. The second large prize opening 55 is provided with a second special electric device (special electric device) 55a that can be displaced between a closed state that makes it impossible for game balls to enter the second large prize opening 55 and an open state that makes it possible for game balls to enter the second large prize opening 55.
The second special electric device 55a is opened and closed by the second large prize opening solenoid 65b (see FIG. 3). Normally, the second special electric device 55a is closed and the game ball cannot enter the second large prize opening 55, but when a "small win" is won by the special pattern lottery (the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery), the second special electric device 55a is opened and the game ball can enter. The second large prize opening 55 allows the game ball flowing down the right path to enter (the game ball flowing down the left path cannot enter).
A second count switch 103b (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the second large prize opening 55. The second count switch 103b outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 55 (entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 55). The main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a payout operation of prize balls in response to input of the detection signal from the second count switch 103b.

A right other winning opening 56 is provided downstream of the second large winning opening 55 on the right side path. The right other winning opening 56 is an entry opening that opens upward and allows game balls to enter at all times. The right other winning opening 56 allows game balls that flow down the right side path to enter (game balls that flow down the left side path cannot enter).
A right winning port switch 105 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the right other winning port 56. The right winning port switch 105 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball that has entered the right other winning port 56 (entry of a game ball into the right other winning port 56). In response to input of the detection signal from the right winning port switch 105, the main control board 200 causes the game ball payout device 440 to execute a payout operation of the prize balls.

At the most downstream side of the game area 30, an outlet 58 is provided for discharging game balls that do not enter (win) any of the winning holes 51 to 56, 57a to 57c.
Here, the inner frame unit 3 includes a discharge path (not shown) through which the game balls discharged from the game area 30 pass. Specifically, the discharge path is attached to the back side of the inner frame of the inner frame unit 3. The pachinko machine 1 is configured so that all game balls shot into the game area 30 (all game balls discharged from the game area 30) pass through the discharge path. That is, the game balls shot into the game area 30 are discharged from the game area 30 by entering any of the winning holes 51 to 56, 57a to 57c, or by passing through the out hole 58, and flow into the discharge path.
Specifically, the game balls entering each of the winning holes 51 to 56, 57a to 57c are guided to the discharge path after being detected by the switches 101, 102a, 102b, 103a, 103b, 105, 106, and 110 disposed in the winning hole. Also, the game balls discharged from the outlet 58 are guided to the discharge path.
An out switch 109 (see FIG. 3) is disposed in the inner frame unit 3. The out switch 109 outputs a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a game ball passing through the discharge path (a game ball discharged from the game area 30). As a result, all game balls discharged from the game area 30 are detected by the out switch 109.
Furthermore, in the game area 30, a plurality of nails (not shown) are arranged so as to guide the game balls to each of the winning holes 51 to 56, 57a to 57c and the starting gate 41.

A main display device 60 is disposed on the game board 11. The main display device 60 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is configured of a light-emitting element (in this embodiment, an LED).
The main display device 60 displays information related to the game.
The main display device 60 is composed of a special chart 1 display device, a special chart 2 display device, a normal chart display device, a special chart 1 reserve display device, a special chart 2 reserve display device, a normal chart reserve display device, a round display device, a right-hand hit display device, a special chance display device, and a time-saving display device.
Specifically, the main display device 60 includes 32 lighting elements (LED1 to LED32).
In the main display device 60, LED1 to LED8 constitute the special chart 1 display device, LED7 to LED16 constitute the special chart 2 display device, LEDs 17 and 18 constitute the normal chart display device, LEDs 19 to LED23 constitute the round display device, LED 24 constitutes the right-hit display device, LEDs 25 and 26 constitute the special chart 1 reserve display device, LEDs 27 and 28 constitute the special chart 2 reserve display device, LEDs 29 and 30 constitute the normal chart reserve display device, LED 31 constitutes the special bonus display device, and LED 32 constitutes the time-saving display device.

The special symbol 1 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the first special symbol consisting of numbers, patterns, etc. Then, the special symbol 1 display device displays the result of the first special symbol lottery by the first special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
The special symbol 2 display device is capable of performing variable display and stop display of the second special symbol consisting of numbers, patterns, etc. Then, the special symbol 2 display device displays the result of the second special symbol lottery by the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed.
Here, the display of the first special pattern on the special pattern 1 display device and the display of the performance patterns z1 and z2 in the performance pattern display area A correspond to the time when the varying display starts, the time when the stopped display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped displayed pattern.
In addition, the display of the second special pattern on the special pattern 2 display device and the display of the performance patterns z1 and z2 in the performance pattern display area B correspond to the time when the varying display starts, the time when the stopped display starts, and the lottery result indicated by the stopped displayed pattern.
Then, when the first special pattern (stopping pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 1 display device becomes a specific pattern (jackpot pattern), or when the second special pattern (stopping pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 2 display device becomes a specific pattern (jackpot pattern), a jackpot game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is created.
In addition, when the first special pattern (stopping pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 1 display device becomes a specific pattern (small win pattern), or when the second special pattern (stopping pattern) displayed in a stopped state on the special chart 2 display device becomes a specific pattern (small win pattern), a small win game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is created.
The normal symbol display device is capable of displaying the variation and stopping of normal symbols consisting of numbers, symbols, etc. The normal symbol lottery result is displayed by the normal symbol displayed in a stopped state on the normal symbol display device. When the normal symbol displayed in a stopped state on the normal symbol display device becomes a specific symbol (a normal symbol winning symbol), a normal symbol winning game state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is generated.

The special pattern 1 pending display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the first special pattern lottery is pending (special pattern 1 pending number).
The special pattern 2 reserved display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the second special pattern lottery is reserved (special pattern 2 reserved number).
The regular symbol pending display device displays the number of times the display of the lottery result of the regular symbol lottery is pending (regular symbol pending number).
The round display device displays the number of rounds of play executed during a big win game state or a small win game state (type of big win game state or type of small win game state).
The right-hand shot display device displays the path (left hand path or right hand path) along which the game ball should be shot.
The probability variation display device displays the game status when the power is restored (whether a special chart high probability state is occurring or a special chart low probability state is occurring).
The time-saving display device displays the current game status (time-saving control being executed or stopped).

In addition, one or more movable body units (not shown) are provided in the pachinko machine 1. In this embodiment, one or more movable body units are provided in the integrated door unit 4, and one or more movable body units are provided in the game board unit 10.
Each movable body unit of the integrated door unit 4 is disposed on the front side of the decorative portion 4b, on the upper surface of the receiving tray unit 5, etc., and is capable of performing predetermined performance operations.
Each movable body unit of the game board unit 10 is attached to the front side of the set board. Specifically, each movable body unit is disposed in the space between the game board 11 and the main image display device 31 (display screen 31a) (hereinafter referred to as the "presentation space"). Each movable body unit is capable of performing a predetermined presentation action in the presentation space.
Each movable body unit includes a performance member, a drive mechanism, a drive source, and a position detection sensor 26 (see FIG. 3). In this embodiment, a motor 23 (see FIG. 3) is used as the drive source. The motor 23 is a stepping motor. Note that a solenoid may be used as the drive source.
The performance member can be displaced in a predetermined direction by a drive mechanism. Specifically, the performance member can be displaced to a plurality of positions including an initial position and a performance position. The performance member is driven (displaced) by a motor 23.

The position detection sensor 26 is composed of a photo sensor or the like. The position detection sensor 26 detects the position of the performance member. Specifically, the position detection sensor 26 includes a light-projecting unit and a light-receiving unit that receives the light projected from the light-projecting unit. The position detection sensor 26 outputs a detection signal to the performance control board 300 in response to the light-receiving unit receiving (detecting) the light projected from the light-projecting unit. On the other hand, the position detection sensor 26 stops outputting the detection signal to the performance control board 300 when the light-receiving unit does not receive (detect) the light projected from the light-projecting unit.
Also, a shielding plate is provided at a predetermined position of the performance member. Then, when the performance member is placed at the initial position, the shielding plate is placed between the light projecting portion and the light receiving portion of the position detection sensor 26, and light is blocked from entering the light receiving portion. As a result, when the performance member is placed at the initial position, the output of a detection signal from the position detection sensor 26 to the performance control board 300 is stopped. On the other hand, when the performance member is not placed at the initial position, a detection signal is output from the position detection sensor 26 to the performance control board 300.
This makes it possible for the performance control board 300 to detect whether or not the performance component is placed in the initial position depending on the input status of the detection signal from the position detection sensor 26.

The pachinko machine 1 is also provided with detection sensors for detecting various abnormal conditions.
In this embodiment, a glass frame opening sensor 107, an inner frame opening sensor 108, a vibration detection sensor 113, a radio wave detection sensor 114, a magnetic detection sensor 115, and the like are provided as detection sensors.
The glass frame opening sensor 107 detects the opening of the integrated door unit 4 relative to the inner frame unit 3. Then, the glass frame opening sensor 107 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the dispensing control board 400 in response to the opening of the integrated door unit 4 relative to the inner frame unit 3.
The inner frame opening sensor 108 detects the opening of the inner frame unit 3 relative to the outer frame unit 2. Then, the inner frame opening sensor 108 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the dispensing control board 400 in response to the opening of the inner frame unit 3 relative to the outer frame unit 2.
The vibration detection sensor 113 detects vibrations of the game board 11. In this embodiment, the vibration detection sensor 113 is disposed on the game board 11. Then, the vibration detection sensor 113 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of vibrations of the game board 11.
The radio wave detection sensors 114 detect radio waves generated around the game board 11. In this embodiment, two radio wave detection sensors 114 are provided on the game board 11. Each radio wave detection sensor 114 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to detection of a radio wave.
The magnetic detection sensor 115 detects magnetism generated around the game board 11. In this embodiment, three magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided. Specifically, one magnetic detection sensor 115 is provided in the inner frame unit 3 (discharge path). In addition, two magnetic detection sensors 115 are provided in the game board 11. The magnetic detection sensor 115 provided in the inner frame unit 3 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 via the payout control board 400 in response to the detection of magnetism. In addition, each magnetic detection sensor 115 provided on the game board 11 transmits a detection signal to the main control board 200 in response to the detection of magnetism.

(Configuration of firing passage r1)
Next, the configuration of the launch passage r1 on the game board 11 will be described.
Fig. 66 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ball return prevention mechanism 14. Fig. 67 is a diagram showing the rotating member 14a in a first state. Fig. 68 is a diagram showing the rotating member 14a in a second state. Fig. 69 is a diagram showing the rotating member 14a in a third state. Note that Fig. 66 shows the state in which the cover 15 covering the front side of the ball return prevention mechanism 14 has been removed.
2, an inner rail 12 and an outer rail 13 are attached to the front of the game board 11. A game area 30 is defined in front of the game board 11 by the inner rail 12, the outer rail 13, etc. As described above, the game area 30 is configured with a left path formed on the left side of the main image display device 31 and a right path formed on the right side of the main image display device 31 as paths along which game balls flow down.
The inner rail 12 is made of resin or the like. The inner rail 12 is configured in an arc shape when viewed from the front side. The outer peripheral surface of the inner rail 12 configures an inner guide surface 12a that guides the game ball.
The outer rail 13 is made of metal. The outer rail 13 is formed in a flat plate shape and extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side. The inner peripheral surface of the outer rail 13 constitutes an outer guide surface 13a that guides the game ball.
An inner guide surface 12a of the inner rail 12 and an outer guide surface 13a of the outer rail 13 are disposed facing each other at a predetermined distance in front of the game board 11. A launch passage r1 that guides game balls launched by the game ball launcher 430 to the game area 30 is formed between the inner guide surface 12a and the outer guide surface 13a.
In addition, a guide passage r2 that guides (guides) the game ball launched from the launch passage r1 to the right-side passage is formed in the game area 30. The guide passage r2 is formed at the upper end of the game area 30. The guide passage r2 is formed above the main image display device 31. The guide passage r2 extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
A game ball launched by the game ball launcher 430 passes through the launch passage r1 and flows into the game area 30. In this case, if the momentum of the launched game ball is weak, the game ball that passed through the launch passage r1 flows into the left path. On the other hand, if the momentum of the launched game ball is strong, the game ball that passed through the launch passage r1 passes through the guide passage r2 and flows into the right path.

66, a ball return prevention mechanism 14 is provided at the tip of the inner rail 12. The ball return prevention mechanism 14 prevents a game ball that has been launched from the launch passage r1 into the game area 30 from returning to the launch passage r1 again.
The ball return prevention mechanism 14 includes a rotating member 14a, a rotating shaft 14b, and a weight (biasing means) 14c.
The rotating member 14a is formed in a generally L-shape when viewed from the front. An opening/closing piece 14d for opening and closing the firing passage r1 is formed at one end of the rotating member 14a. A weight 14c is provided at the other end of the rotating member 14a. Furthermore, a rotation shaft 14b is provided at a corner of the rotating member 14a.
The rotating member 14a is attached to the tip of the inner rail 12 so that the tip of the opening/closing piece 14d extends upward. The rotating member 14a is rotatable around the rotation shaft 14b. At this time, the rotating member 14a is rotatable so that the tip of the opening/closing piece 14d opens and closes the launch passage r1. The rotating member 14a is biased by the weight of the weight 14c toward the side where the launch passage r1 is closed by the tip of the opening/closing piece 14d (counterclockwise side shown in Figures 66 to 69). As a result, when the game balls launched by the game ball launching device 430 are not pushing up the inner surface of the opening/closing piece 14d, the rotating member 14a is pressed against a mechanical stopper (not shown) and is arranged (maintained) in the closed position (see Figure 67).

When the rotating member 14a is in the closed position, the tip of the opening/closing piece 14d closes the launch passage r1, preventing the game ball launched from the launch passage r1 into the play area 30 from returning to the launch passage r1. In other words, even if a game ball attempting to return to the launch passage r1 collides with the outer surface of the opening/closing piece 14d, the state in which the rotating member 14a is pressed against the mechanical stopper is maintained, and the closure of the launch passage r1 by the opening/closing piece 14d is not released. As a result, the game ball that collides with the outer surface of the opening/closing piece 14d does not return to the launch passage r1, but is reflected off the outer surface of the opening/closing piece 14d and falls down the play area 30.
On the other hand, when the game machine is launched by the game ball launcher 430 in a state where the rotating member 14a is arranged in the closed position, the launched game ball collides with the inner surface of the opening/closing piece 14d and pushes up the opening/closing piece 14d against the weight of the weight 14c, causing the rotating member 14a to rotate toward the side where the closing of the launch passage r1 by the tip of the opening/closing piece 14d is released (the clockwise side shown in Figures 66 to 69). As a result, the launched game ball passes between the inner surface of the opening/closing piece 14d and the outer guide surface 13a, and is launched from the launch passage r1 into the game area 30. Note that when the launched game ball passes between the inner surface of the opening/closing piece 14d and the outer guide surface 13a, the rotating member 14a is rotated by the weight of the weight 14c toward the side where the launch passage r1 is closed by the tip of the opening/closing piece 14d (the counterclockwise side shown in Figures 66 to 69) and returns to the closed position.

In particular, depending on the state of the game ball launched by the game ball launching device 430, the rotating member 14a can be rotated (displaced) to a first state, a second state, or a third state.
The first state is a state in which the rotating member 14a is disposed in the closed position. When the game ball PB1 launched by the game ball launching device 430 does not push up the inner surface of the opening and closing piece 14d, the rotating member 14a constitutes the first state. As shown in FIG. 67, when the rotating member 14a constitutes the first state, the distance between the tip of the opening and closing piece 14d and the outer guide surface 13a (hereinafter referred to as the "open distance D1") is smaller than the diameter of the game ball PB. As a result, when the rotating member 14a constitutes the first state, the game ball PB2 attempting to return from the game area 30 to the launch passage r1 is blocked from entering the launch passage r1 by the opening and closing piece 14d, and is unable to enter the launch passage r1.
The second state is the state of the rotating member 14a when the game ball PB1 launched by the game ball launching device 430 pushes up the opening and closing piece 14d and passes between the tip of the opening and closing piece 14d and the outer guide surface 13a. As shown in FIG. 68, when the rotating member 14a is in the second state, the opening distance D1 is larger than when the rotating member 14a is in the first state. Specifically, when the rotating member 14a is in the second state, the opening distance D1 is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball PB. As a result, the game ball PB1 launched by the game ball launching device 430 passes between the tip of the opening and closing piece 14d and the outer guide surface 13a, and is guided from the launch passage r1 to the game area 30. Then, when the launched game ball PB1 passes between the tip of the opening and closing piece 14d and the outer guide surface 13a, the rotating member 14a returns from the second state to the first state.
The third state is a state of the rotating member 14a when the timing when the game ball PB1 launched by the game ball launching device 430 reaches the tip of the opening/closing piece 14d coincides with the timing when the game ball PB2 launched into the play area 30 before the game ball PB1 returns to the tip of the opening/closing piece 14d, and the game balls PB1 and PB2 collide. When the rotating member 14a is in the third state, the game ball PB1 is in contact with the inner surface of the opening/closing piece 14d, the outer guide surface 13a, and the game ball PB2. Also, when the rotating member 14a is in the third state, the game ball PB2 is in contact with the tip of the opening/closing piece 14d, the outer guide surface 13a, and the game ball PB1. As shown in FIG. 69, when the rotating member 14a is in the third state, the opening interval D1 is larger than when the rotating member 14a is in the first state, and is smaller than when the rotating member 14a is in the second state. Specifically, when the rotating member 14a is in the third state, the opening interval D1 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball PB. In particular, when the rotating member 14a is in the third state, the opening interval D1 is smaller than the distance D2 from the lowest point of the game ball PB2 to the outer guide surface 13a. As a result, even if the game ball PB2 advances toward the launch passage r1 after colliding with the game ball PB1, it will come into contact with the tip of the opening/closing piece 14d from the outer surface side, and the rotating member 14a is more likely to be rotated toward the side where the launch passage r1 is closed by the tip of the opening/closing piece 14d (counterclockwise side shown in FIG. 66 to FIG. 69). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball PB2 to enter the launch passage r1. Therefore, even when the game ball PB1 and the game ball PB2 collide with each other, it is possible to prevent the game ball PB2 from returning to the launch passage r1.

(Control system configuration)
Next, the configuration of the control system in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
Fig. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachinko machine. Fig. 4 is an address map of the memory area used by the CPU 210.
The pachinko machine 1 is equipped with various control boards.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with multiple control boards, including a main control board 200, a performance control board 300, a payout control board 400, a power supply board 600 that supplies power (electricity) to each of the control boards 200, 300, 400, etc., a driver board 310, a sub-connection board 320, etc.
The control boards 200, 300, 400, and 600 are independent (separate) circuit boards, and are housed in individual board cases (such as a main board case 250, which will be described later).
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are included in the game board unit 10. Specifically, the main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are attached to the back side of the game board 11.
The dispensing control board 400 is included in the inner frame unit 3. Specifically, the dispensing control board 400 is attached to the rear side of the inner frame provided in the inner frame unit 3.

(Configuration of main control board 200)
First, the configuration of the main control board 200 will be described.
The main control board 200 controls the progress of the game.
The main control board 200 is composed of a one-chip microcomputer, a clock generating circuit 202, a random number generating circuit 203, an input port 204, an output port 205, a performance display device 206, a RAM clear switch 207, a setting key switch 208, a sink driver 240, and source drivers 250a, 250b, etc.
The one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, the one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU 210, a ROM 220, a RAM 230, etc.

The main control board 200 is configured to include a memory area used by the CPU 210. As shown in Fig. 4, the memory area used by the CPU 210 is configured to include a memory area (0000H to 2FFFH) allocated to the ROM 220 and a memory area (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the RAM 230.
Here, in FIG. 4, addresses for specifying memory areas are shown in hexadecimal numbers ("H" indicates that the number is hexadecimal).

The ROM 220 (the memory area of the ROM 220) is configured to include a used area m1 (0000H to 1A7AH) and a non-used area m2 (2000H to 2BFFH).
The used area m1 is configured to include a program area, an unused area, and a data area. The program area stores a program (program code) for controlling the progress of the game. The data area stores data (program data) for controlling the progress of the game. Note that the used area m1 may be configured without including the unused area.
The unused area m2 includes a program area and a data area.
The program area stores a program (program code) for executing processing related to tests defined by the gaming machine regulations, and a program (program code) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206 (specifically, calculating the base ratio). The data area stores data (program data) for executing processing related to tests defined by the gaming machine regulations, and data (program data) for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
In addition to the used area m1 and unused area m2, the ROM 220 is also provided with an unused area, a ROM comment area, a program management area, and the like.
The ROM comment area stores arbitrary data such as the title and version of a program, etc. On the other hand, the program management area stores information necessary for the CPU 210 to execute various programs.
In addition, an unused area m3 of a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area m1 and the unused area m2 in the ROM 220. This clarifies the boundary between the used area m1 and the unused area m2.

The RAM 230 (the memory area of the RAM 230) is configured to include a used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) and a non-used area M2 (F300H to F3FFH).
The usage area M1 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. Meanwhile, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of the program (program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1. Note that the use area M1 may be configured without including an unused area.
Specifically, the work area is composed of a setting value area, a gaming machine status flag area, a checksum area, a backup flag area, an error-related area, a normal game-related area 1, and a normal game-related area 2.
The set value area stores a set value. The gaming machine status flag area stores a gaming machine status flag. The checksum area stores a checksum. The backup flag area stores a backup flag. The error-related area stores information about an error. The normal game-related area 1 stores a subcommand pointer, etc. The normal game-related area 2 stores input/output data in the main control board 200, data for arithmetic processing, various counters (random number counter, timer counter, etc.), flags for managing lottery results and game states, etc. In particular, the normal game-related area 2 includes an area (a game information storage area described later) for storing game information acquired upon input of detection signals from the special figure 1 start port switch 101, the special figure 2 start port switches 102a, 102b, and the gate switch 104, a special figure 1 display pattern counter, a special figure 2 display pattern counter, a normal figure display pattern counter, etc.
The non-used area M2 includes a work area and a stack area.
The work area is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program stored in unused area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test defined in the gaming machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206). On the other hand, the stack area is used as an area for temporarily saving various data during execution of a program stored in unused area m2 (a program for executing a process related to a test defined in the gaming machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206).
Specifically, the work area includes a performance display related area, which is used as an area for temporarily storing various data during execution of a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206.
Furthermore, an unused area M3 of a certain number of bytes (16 bytes or more) is provided between the used area M1 and the unused area M2 in the RAM 230. This clarifies the boundary between the used area M1 and the unused area M2.

In this embodiment, in processing based on a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the use area m1, it is permitted to refer to data stored in the non-use area M2.
On the other hand, data stored in non-use area M2 is prohibited from being rewritten (changed) by processing based on a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in use area m1.
In addition, in processing based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests defined in the gaming machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206), it is permitted to refer to data stored in the used area M1.
On the other hand, data stored in the use area M1 is prohibited from being rewritten (changed) by processing based on a program stored in the non-use area m2 (a program for executing processing related to tests specified in the gaming machine rules, or a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206).
The game on the pachinko machine 1 can proceed (be completed) according to a program (a program for controlling the progress of the game) stored in the usage area m1.

The clock generation circuit 202 generates a clock (synchronization signal) at a predetermined clock frequency (12 MHz in this embodiment), and outputs this clock to both the CPU 210 and the random number generation circuit 203 .
The random number generating circuit 203 is configured to include a first loop counter which generates a winning random number for a normal pattern lottery, a second loop counter which generates a jackpot random number for a first special pattern lottery, a third loop counter which generates a jackpot random number for a second special pattern lottery, and a fourth loop counter which generates a reach group random number.
The first loop counter generates a winning random number for the normal symbol lottery by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generating circuit 202. In this embodiment, the value of the first loop counter is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The second loop counter generates a jackpot random number for the first special symbol lottery by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generating circuit 202. In this embodiment, the second loop counter value is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).

The third loop counter generates a jackpot random number for the second special symbol lottery by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) every time one clock is input from the clock generating circuit 202. In this embodiment, the third loop counter value is updated every 0.083 [μs] (1 [s]/12 [MHz]=0.083 [μs]).
The fourth loop counter generates reach group random numbers by updating the loop counter value by one within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 10006) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (once per 32 divisions of the clock frequency). In this embodiment, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated every 2.666 [μs] (32 [s]/12 [MHz]=2.666 [μs]).

The input port 204 is configured to include a plurality of input ports (in this embodiment, input port 0 to input port 3).
Input port 0 receives a detection signal from the glass frame opening sensor 107, a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108, a detection signal from the vibration detection sensor 113, a detection signal from one of the radio wave detection sensors 114, a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 115, etc.
To the input port 1, a RAM clear signal from a RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from a setting key switch 208, etc. are input.
Input port 2 receives detection signals from each count switch 103a, 103b, a detection signal from the right prize slot switch 105, a detection signal from the left prize slot switch 106, a detection signal from the out switch 109, and a detection signal from the other radio wave detection sensor 114.
The input port 3 receives detection signals from the special diagram 1 start port switch 101, detection signals from each special diagram 2 start port switch 102a, 102b, a detection signal from the gate switch 104, a detection signal from the V area switch 110, etc.
Each input port (input port 0 to input port 3) is provided with a reception memory area corresponding to each switch/sensor (detection signal). In the reception memory area corresponding to each switch/sensor, 1-bit data is set that indicates the reception state of the detection signal from the switch/sensor.
Specifically, a "1" is set in the receiving memory area corresponding to each switch/sensor when a detection signal is input from that switch/sensor (high level), and a "0" is set when no detection signal is input from that switch/sensor (low level).

The output port 205 is configured to include a plurality of output ports (in this embodiment, output port 0 to output port 4).
The output port 0 outputs data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60. The data signals output from the output port 0 are then input to the source driver 250a.
The output port 1 outputs common signals (“COM0” to “COM3”) for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 and the performance display device 206. The common signals output from the output port 1 are input to the sink driver 240.
The output port 2 outputs an external signal. At this time, the external signal output from the output port 2 is input to the hall computer via the payout control board 400 and the external terminal board 450.
The output port 3 outputs a control signal for controlling the operation of the normal electric role solenoid 64, a control signal for controlling the operation of each large prize port solenoid 65a, 65b, a control signal for controlling the V-area solenoid 66, etc.
The output port 4 outputs data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206. The data signals output from the output port 4 are then input to the source driver 250b.

The main control board 200 is configured to include a command output port 1 and a command output port 2. The CPU 210 transmits a control command (sub-command) from the command output port 1 to the performance control board 300, and transmits a control command (payout command) from the command output port 2 to the payout control board 400.
Each of the command output ports 1 and 2 has a transmission data register (not shown), a FIFO (First In First Out) buffer (not shown), and a transmission shift register (not shown).
The transmission data register outputs the control command input based on a subcommand transmission process (step S2-4) described later to the FIFO buffer.
The FIFO buffer is made up of a plurality of registers and is capable of storing a plurality of control commands. The FIFO buffer stores the control commands input from the transmission data register and outputs the stored control commands to the transmission shift register in the order in which they were input.
The transmitting shift register performs parallel-to-serial conversion on the control commands input from the FIFO buffer, and transmits them as serial data to the performance control board 300 or the payout control board 400.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include a plurality of lighting elements (segments). Each lighting element is configured with a light-emitting element (in this embodiment, an LED). Note that the performance display device 206 is arranged on the rear side of the game board 11, so that it cannot be seen by the player.
As described later, the following states of the gaming machine (hereinafter, "gaming machine state") are defined for the pachinko machine 1: a playable state, a setting change state, a setting check state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, and a backup abnormal state. Then, the information displayed on the performance display device 206 changes according to the gaming machine state that has occurred.

The performance display device 206 is configured to include four (four-digit) display units (not shown). Each display unit is composed of eight lighting elements. That is, each display unit is composed of a seven-segment LED capable of displaying numbers, symbols, etc., and a dot segment LED capable of displaying dots such as decimal points.
Specifically, the performance display device 206 is configured to include 32 lighting elements (LED 33 to LED 64). In the performance display device 206, LED 33 to LED 40 are a display section for the first digit, LED 41 to LED 48 are a display section for the second digit, LED 49 to LED 56 are a display section for the third digit, and LED 57 to LED 64 are a display section for the fourth digit.

During the playable state, the game can proceed. During the playable state, the performance display device 206 displays the base ratio.
In this embodiment, while a playable state occurs, the performance display device 206 alternately displays a first base ratio and a second base ratio at predetermined time intervals (5.0 [s] in this embodiment).
The "first base ratio" is the base ratio for the current section (the base ratio calculated for the period from the start of the current section to the present time).
The "second base ratio" is the base ratio of the previous interval (the final base ratio calculated for the previous interval).
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, of the four-digit display section, the top two digits display information for identifying the type of base ratio (first base ratio or second base ratio), and the bottom two digits display a number indicating the base ratio (percentage).

During the setting change state, the setting values can be changed. During the setting change state, the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, of the four-digit display section, the top three digits display information indicating that a setting change state is occurring (specifically, the top digit displays "r", the second top digit displays "n.", and the third top digit displays "-"), and the lowest digit displays a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area.
During the setting confirmation state, the setting values can be confirmed. During the setting confirmation state, the setting values stored (set) in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, of the four-digit display section, the top three digits display information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring (specifically, the top digit displays "r", the second top digit displays "n.", and the top digit displays no display), and the lowest digit displays a number indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area.

During the occurrence of a game stop state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state), it is impossible to continue playing the game. During the occurrence of a game stop state, an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is displayed on the performance display device 206.
Specifically, in the performance display device 206, of the four-digit display section, the top three digits display information indicating that a game stop state is occurring (specifically, the top digit displays "E", the second top digit displays "r.", and the top digit displays no display), and the lowest digit displays a number indicating an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred (setting abnormality state, RAM abnormality state, or backup abnormality state).

The RAM clear switch 207 is a tactile switch. That is, the RAM clear switch 207 includes an operation portion that can be pressed. When the operation portion is pressed, the RAM clear switch 207 outputs a RAM clear signal to the input port 1.
The setting key switch 208 is a key lock switch. That is, the setting key switch 208 is configured to include an operation unit with a keyhole. The operation unit is unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole, and it becomes possible to rotate (switch) the operation unit from the OFF state to the ON state. When the operation unit is in the ON state, the setting key switch 208 outputs a detection signal to the input port 1.

The sink driver 240 controls the output of common signals to each of the display devices 60 and 206 in response to the common signals (“COM 0 ” to “COM 3 ”) output from the output port 1 .
The source driver 250a controls the output of data signals to the main display device 60 in response to the data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") output from output port 0.
The source driver 250 b controls the output of data signals to the performance display device 206 in response to the data signals (“7SEGDATA0” to “7SEGDATA7”) output from the output port 4 .
As a result, the source driver 250 a and the sink driver 240 control the lighting of the lighting elements (LED 1 to LED 32 ) included in the main display device 60 .
Furthermore, the source driver 250 b and the sink driver 240 control the lighting of the lighting elements (LED 33 to LED 64 ) included in the performance display device 206 .

Furthermore, the main control board 200 is configured to include a test signal output circuit (not shown).
In a test signal output process (step S4-24) described later, the CPU 210 generates test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, execution state of time-saving control, probability state of special symbol selection, etc.) and stores the generated test signal in a port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the test signal stored in the port output request buffer is output from a specified output port. The test signal output from the specified output port is then input to an interface board of a test computer (not shown) via a test signal output circuit.
In addition, in the main control board 200, detection signals from the special chart 1 start port switch 101, detection signals from each special chart 2 start port switch 102a, 102b, detection signals from the gate switch 104, detection signals from each count switch 103a, 103b, detection signals from the right winning port switch 105, detection signals from the left winning port switch 106, detection signals from the out switch 109, etc. are input to the input port 204 and are input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit.
Furthermore, in the main control board 200, control signals for controlling the operation of each solenoid (normal electric role solenoid 64, large prize opening solenoids 65a, 65b, V-area solenoid 66, etc.) output from output port 3 are input to each solenoid 64, 65a, 65b, 66, and are also input to the interface board of the test computer via the test signal output circuit.

(Configuration of the dispensing control board 400)
Next, the configuration of the dispensing control board 400 will be described.
The payout control board 400 controls the launch of game balls into the game area 30 and the payout of the game balls.
The dispensing control board 400 is configured to include a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, a one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, etc.
The payout control board 400 controls the game ball payout operation by the game ball payout device 440 based on each of the control commands received from the main control board 200 and the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit.
In addition, the payout control board 400 controls the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 based on the detection signal input from the launch volume 410. Specifically, it controls the game ball launching operation by the game ball launcher 430 so that the game ball is launched into the game area 30 with a strength according to the detection signal input from the launch volume 410.

(Configuration of the performance control board 300)
Next, the configuration of the performance control board 300 will be described.
The performance control board 300 controls the performance.
The performance control board 300 is configured to include a one-chip microcomputer.
A one-chip microcomputer is an LSI that integrates a CPU core, a register, a semiconductor memory, etc. Specifically, a one-chip microcomputer includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a VDP, a sound processor, an illumination controller, a motor controller, etc.
Based on control commands received from the main control board 200, the performance control board 300 controls the display of performance images on various image display devices 31, 32, the lighting of various lamps 20, 21, the output of sound from various speakers 22, and the driving of motors 23 that drive various movable body units.

The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores programs related to the progress of the performance, data necessary for the progress of the performance, etc.
The RAM of the performance control board 300 temporarily stores control commands received from the main control board 200, data for performing arithmetic processing, etc.
The CPU of the performance control board 300 determines the performance content to be executed based on the control command received from the main control board 200, and sets a performance program (performance control table) corresponding to the determined performance content.
The VDP generates display control data (display control signals) in accordance with a performance program (performance control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated display control data to the various image display devices 31 and 32 .
The sound processor generates sound control data (sound control signal) according to the performance program (performance control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated sound control data to a digital audio power amplifier (not shown). The digital audio power amplifier generates control signals corresponding to the various speakers 22 based on the sound control data input from the sound processor, and outputs the generated control signals to the various speakers 22 via the sub-connection board 320.
The illumination controller generates lamp control data (lamp control signal) in accordance with a performance program (performance control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated lamp control data to each of the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320.
The motor controller generates motor control data (motor control signal) in accordance with the performance program (performance control table) set by the CPU, and outputs the generated motor control data to each of the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320.

(Configuration of the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320)
Next, the configurations of the driver board 310 and the sub-connection board 320 will be described.
The driver board 310 includes a motor driver (not shown) and a lamp driver (not shown).
The motor control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the motor driver. Then, the motor driver controls the output of excitation signals (drive currents) to the various motors 23 (such as the motors 23 that constitute the movable body units) arranged in the game board unit 10 according to the motor control data input from the performance control board 300.
The lamp control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the lamp driver. Then, the lamp driver controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups of each system that constitutes the panel lamp 21 according to the lamp control data input from the performance control board 300.
The sub-connection board 320 is configured to include a motor driver (not shown) and a lamp driver (not shown).
The motor control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the motor driver. Then, the motor driver controls the output of excitation signals (drive currents) to the various motors 23 (such as the motors 23 constituting the movable body units) arranged in the integrated door unit 4 according to the motor control data input from the performance control board 300.
The lamp control data output from the performance control board 300 is input to the lamp driver. Then, the lamp driver controls the driving (light emission) of the light emitting element groups of each system that constitutes the frame lamp 20 according to the lamp control data input from the performance control board 300.

(Regarding the arrangement of pin marks PS in molded products)
Next, the arrangement of the pin marks PS in the molded product will be described.
The pachinko machine 1 is configured to include various molded parts. In this embodiment, the molded parts are formed by injection molding using a resin material.
Specifically, a molded product is formed by injecting heated and molten resin into a pair of molds (a fixed mold and a movable mold) and then cooling and solidifying it. Here, the molded product formed by the pair of molds becomes tightly attached to the movable mold due to the cooling and contraction of the resin.
Therefore, the movable die is provided with an ejector pin (ejector pin, E-pin) for removing (pushing out/ejecting) the molded product from the die. The ejector pin is formed in a rod shape, and can be displaced between a recessed position where its tip is recessed into the surface of the die and a protruding position where its tip protrudes from the surface of the die. After a molded product is molded by the pair of dies, the ejector pin is displaced from the recessed position to the protruding position, whereby the molded product is pushed out (ejected) by the tip of the ejector pin, and the molded product can be removed from the movable die.

Here, a mark of the ejector pin (hereinafter, referred to as "pin mark PS") remains on the surface of the molded product pushed out by the ejector pin at the portion where the tip of the ejector pin makes contact. Depending on the position of the pin mark PS, various defects may occur in the molded product.
For example, in a molded product that includes a passage for game media (game balls, medals, etc.), if pin marks PS are placed on the inner surface of the passage, the progress of the game media passing through the passage may be impeded, and the game media may behave in an unintended manner. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, in a molded product that includes a passage for game media (game balls, medals, etc.), the pin marks PS are not placed on the inner surface of the passage, but are placed at a position that avoids the inner surface of the passage. This prevents the progress of the game media passing through the passage from being impeded, and prevents the game media from behaving in an unintended manner.
Furthermore, if the pin marks PS are placed in a position on the molded product that is visible to the player, there is a risk that the design of the molded product will be degraded. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the pin marks PS are placed in a position on the molded product that is not visible to the player. This prevents a situation in which the design of the molded product will be degraded.
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described.

Example 1
First, a description will be given of a first embodiment of the present invention. The first embodiment is an example in which the present invention is applied to a game ball payout device 440.
Fig. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the game ball payout device 440. Fig. 60 is a perspective view showing the back side of the cover member 470 according to the first embodiment.
A storage tank (not shown) for storing game balls and a game ball payout device (payout unit) 440 for paying out the game balls are arranged on the back of the pachinko machine 1. The game balls stored in the storage tank are sent to the game ball payout device 440 through a predetermined passage (not shown). The payout control board 400 controls the payout of game balls by the game ball payout device 440 (controls the driving of a motor 442 described later) based on each of the control command received from the main control board 200 and the ball lending instruction signal received from the CR unit. The game balls paid out by the game ball payout device 440 flow into the receiving tray 5a through a payout passage (not shown).
59, the game ball payout device 440 includes a game ball waiting passage R1 through which game balls can pass and wait (store), a sprocket 441 capable of sending out (paying out) the game balls waiting in the game ball waiting passage R1 one by one, and a motor 442 that rotates the sprocket 441. In the game ball payout device 440, the game balls waiting in the game ball waiting passage R1 are paid out one by one by the rotation of the sprocket 441.
Specifically, the game ball payout device 440 is configured to include a base member 460 and a cover member 470 arranged on the front side (front surface side) of the base member 460 .
The base member 460 is a molded product made of resin. The base member 460 is formed in a flat plate shape. The sprocket 441 and the motor 442 are disposed on the front surface of the base member 460.
The cover member 470 is a molded product made of resin. As shown in Fig. 60, the cover member 470 includes a front plate 471 formed in a flat plate shape and a wall member provided so as to rise from the rear surface of the front plate 471 toward the rear surface side. In this embodiment, the wall member includes an outer peripheral wall w1, a pair of partition walls w2, and a rib w3.
The outer peripheral wall w1 is provided along each end side of the front plate 471. As a result, the outer peripheral wall w1 is provided so as to surround the front plate 471.
The pair of partition walls w2 are provided in an area inside the outer peripheral wall w1. The pair of partition walls w2 partition the game ball waiting passage R1.
The rib w3 is provided in the inner region of the outer peripheral wall w1. The rib w3 reinforces the cover member 470.
In the game ball payout device 440, a game ball waiting passage R1 is partitioned between the base member 460 and the front plate 471 of the cover member 470 by a pair of partition walls w2. That is, the game ball waiting passage R1 is partitioned by an area between the pair of partition walls w2 on the front side of the base member 460, an area between the pair of partition walls w2 on the back side of the front plate 471, an inner surface of one partition wall w2, and an inner surface of the other partition wall w2. As a result, the inner surface of the game ball waiting passage R1 (an inner surface partitioning the back side, an inner surface partitioning the front side, an inner surface partitioning the side surface on one side, and an inner surface partitioning the side surface on the other side) is configured by the area between the pair of partition walls w2 on the front side of the base member 460, an area between the pair of partition walls w2 on the back side of the front plate 471, an inner surface of one partition wall w2, and an inner surface of the other partition wall w2. Here, the inner surface of the game ball waiting passage R1 is a surface with which the game ball passing through the game ball waiting passage R1 may come into contact.
In the base member 460, the pin marks PS are arranged at positions that avoid the inner surface of the game ball waiting passage R1. That is, the pin marks PS are not arranged in the area between the pair of partition walls w2 on the front surface of the base member 460. In this embodiment, the pin marks PS are arranged in areas other than the area between the pair of partition walls w2 on the front surface of the base member 460. Alternatively, the pin marks PS are arranged on the back surface of the base member 460.
Furthermore, in the cover member 470, the pin marks PS are arranged at positions that avoid the inner surface of the game ball waiting passage R1. That is, the pin marks PS are not arranged in the area between the pair of partition walls w2 on the back surface of the front plate 471. In this embodiment, the pin marks PS are arranged in areas of the back surface of the front plate 471 other than the area between the pair of partition walls w2. In this case, the pin marks PS are arranged on both sides of the game ball waiting passage R1, so as to sandwich the game ball waiting passage R1.
As described above, in the game ball payout device 440 according to Example 1, the pin marks PS are arranged on the back surface of the front plate 471 of the cover member 470. In this case, the pin marks PS are arranged at a position on the back surface of the front plate 471 that avoids the area that becomes the inner surface of the game ball waiting passage R1. This improves the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the pin marks PS, while preventing a situation in which the progress of the game ball passing through the game ball payout device 440 is impeded, and makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball behaves in an unintended manner.

Example 2
Next, a description will be given of a second embodiment of the present invention. The second embodiment is an example in which the present invention is applied to a game ball payout device 440.
FIG. 61 is a perspective view showing the rear side of the cover member 470 according to the second embodiment.
The configuration of the game ball payout device 440 according to Example 2 is the same as the configuration of the game ball payout device 440 according to Example 1. However, in the game ball payout device 440 according to Example 2, the arrangement of the pin marks PS on the cover member 470 is different from that of the game ball payout device 440 according to Example 1.
That is, in the cover member 470 according to the second embodiment, the pin marks PS are arranged on the end faces (end faces facing the rear side) of the wall members (the outer peripheral wall w1, the partition wall w2, or the rib w3). In particular, the pin marks PS are arranged on the end faces of at least one of the wall members among the outer peripheral wall w1, the partition wall w2, and the rib w3.
In this case, the wall member may be configured to have a larger (thicker) thickness in the portion where the pin marks PS are arranged, compared to other portions of the wall member, thereby making it possible to secure a wide area for arranging the pin marks PS.
Here, in the cover member 470, the end face of the wall member (the outer peripheral wall w1, the partition wall w2, or the rib w3) becomes the joining surface that contacts the front face of the base member 460. As a result, if a convex pin mark PS is formed on the end face of the wall member, when the cover member 470 is assembled to the base member 460, a gap is generated between the end face of the wall member and the front face of the base member 460, and the assembly of the cover member 470 to the base member 460 may be incomplete. Therefore, in this embodiment, the pin mark PS arranged on the end face of the wall member is made concave. In particular, during molding with a mold, a recess (hole) is formed on the end face of the wall member, and the pin mark PS is arranged inside the recess. This makes it possible to prevent the assembly of the cover member 470 to the base member 460 from being incomplete.
Furthermore, in this embodiment, a draft angle is set for the wall member on which the pin marks PS are arranged. That is, the wall member on which the pin marks PS are arranged is inclined with respect to a line (virtual line) perpendicular to the front plate 410 so as to facilitate removal from the mold. Specifically, when the pin marks PS are arranged on the end face of the outer peripheral wall w1, the outer peripheral wall w1 is inclined so as to fall toward the outside. Also, when the pin marks PS are arranged on the end faces of a pair of partition walls w2, the pair of partition walls w2 are inclined so that the distance between the rear side is larger than the distance between the front side (front plate 471 side) (so as to open toward the rear side). This makes it possible to easily remove the cover member 470 from the mold using an ejection pin.
As described above, in the cover member 470 according to the second embodiment, the pin marks PS are arranged on the end faces of the wall members (the outer peripheral wall w1, the partition wall w2, or the rib w3). This makes it possible to prevent the progress of the game balls passing through the game ball payout device 440 from being impeded, and makes it possible to prevent the game balls from behaving in an unintended manner. Even if the cover member 470 is made of a transparent or translucent material, it is possible to make the pin marks PS difficult to see when viewed from the front side, and to prevent a decrease in design.

Example 3
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described. The third embodiment is an example in which the present invention is applied to a game ball payout device 440.
Fig. 62 is a rear view of the cover member 470 according to Example 3. Fig. 62(a) shows the cover member 470 in a state where the waste portion 472 is provided, and Fig. 62(b) shows the cover member 470 in a state where the waste portion 472 has been cut away.
The configuration of the game ball payout device 440 according to Example 3 is the same as the configuration of the game ball payout device 440 according to Example 1. However, in the game ball payout device 440 according to Example 3, the arrangement of the pin marks PS on the cover member 470 is different from that of the game ball payout device 440 according to Example 1.
That is, in the cover member 470 according to the third embodiment, a discarded portion 472 which is a portion for pushing out by the ejector pin is provided, and the pin mark PS is disposed in the discarded portion 472 .
Specifically, as shown in Fig. 62(a), the cover member 470 according to Example 3 is formed as a molded product in which a waste portion 472 is provided in the wall member during molding using a mold, and pin marks PS are arranged in the waste portion 472. In this example, the waste portion 472 is provided in the outer peripheral wall w1. Then, as shown in Fig. 62(b), after the cover member 470 is removed from the mold using an ejection pin, the waste portion 472 is cut off to form a finished product.
As described above, in the cover member 470 according to Example 3, a waste portion 472 is provided in the molded product, and the pin marks PS are arranged in the waste portion 472. Then, after the cover member 470 is removed from the mold, the waste portion 472 is cut away. This makes it possible to ensure a wide area for arranging the pin marks PS. Also, since the pin marks PS do not remain in the cover member 470, it is possible to prevent a decrease in design.

Example 4
Next, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described. The fourth embodiment is an example in which the present invention is applied to a rail base 520.
Figure 63 is a perspective view showing the front side of the game board 11. Figure 64 is a perspective view showing a state in which the outer rail 530 is removed from the rail base 520.
As shown in Figure 63, an inner rail 510 (corresponding to the inner rail 12 shown in Figure 2), a rail base 520, and an outer rail 530 (corresponding to the outer rail 13 shown in Figure 2) are attached to the front of the game board 11.
The inner rail 510 is a molded product made of resin. When viewed from the front side, the inner rail 510 is configured in an arc shape. The outer peripheral surface of the inner rail 510 forms an inner guide surface (not shown) that guides the game ball. A return ball prevention piece 511 (corresponding to the ball return prevention mechanism 14 shown in FIG. 66) is provided at the tip of the inner rail 510. The return ball prevention piece 511 prevents the game ball launched from the launch passage r1 to the game area 30 from returning to the launch passage r1 again.
The rail base 520 is a molded product made of resin. As shown in Fig. 64, the rail base 520 is provided with a guide surface 521 that supports the outer rail 530. The guide surface 521 extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
At least a portion of the guide surface 521 in the longitudinal direction is inclined toward the rear side (the front side of the game board 11). In this embodiment, substantially the entire longitudinal area of the guide surface 521 is inclined toward the rear side. This allows at least a portion (substantially the entire area in this embodiment) of the outer guide surface 531 of the outer rail 530 supported by the guide surface 521 in the longitudinal direction to be inclined toward the rear side (the front side of the game board 11). This makes it difficult for the game ball launched by the game ball launcher 430 to flow toward the front side (the transparent plate 4a side), making it possible to suppress contact with the transparent plate 4a.
A plurality of protrusions (bosses) pr are provided on the guide surface 521. Each protrusion pr is formed as a substantially elliptical convex portion and is provided so as to protrude from the guide surface 521. Each protrusion pr is fitted into a guide hole gh provided in the outer rail 530, and determines the position of the outer rail 530 relative to the rail base 520 (game board 11).
The outer rail 530 is made of metal and has a flat plate shape, and extends in an arc shape when viewed from the front side.
The outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 530 formed in an arc shape is supported by a guide surface 521 of the rail base 520. The inner peripheral surface of the outer rail 530 formed in an arc shape constitutes an outer guide surface 531 that guides the game ball.
A plurality of guide holes gh are provided in the outer rail 530 (outer guide surface 531). Each guide hole gh is a through hole that penetrates the outer rail 530 in the thickness direction. Each guide hole gh is a substantially elliptical through hole into which the protrusion pr can be fitted.
In the outer rail 530 (outer guide surface 531), guide holes gh are provided at positions corresponding to the respective protrusions pr provided on the guide surface 521 when the outer rail 530 is supported (attached) on the guide surface 521. As a result, the guide holes gh and the protrusions pr guide (prescribe) the attachment position of the outer rail 530 relative to the rail base 520 (guide surface 521), and further guide (prescribe) the attachment position of the outer rail 530 relative to the game board 11.
To attach the outer rail 530 to the game board 11, first, the rail base 520 is attached to the front of the game board 11. To do this, a positioning protrusion (not shown) provided on the back side of the rail base 520 is inserted into a positioning recess (not shown) provided on the front of the game board 11. This positions the rail base 520 at a predetermined position on the front of the game board 11. The rail base 520 is then fixed to the front of the game board 11 by screws.
Next, the outer rail 530 is attached to the rail base 520. To do this, the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 530 is arranged along the guide surface 521 of the rail base 520. Then, each protrusion pr provided on the guide surface 521 is inserted (fitted) into each guide hole gh provided in the outer rail 530. As a result, the outer rail 530 is attached to the rail base 520 with substantially the entire longitudinal direction of the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 530 supported by the guide surface 521.
In front of the game board 11, a game area 30 is defined by an inner rail 510, an outer rail 530, etc. In addition, in front of the game board 11, an inner guide surface of the inner rail 510 and an outer guide surface 531 of the outer rail 530 are arranged facing each other at a predetermined distance. A launch passage r1 that guides game balls launched by the game ball launching device 430 to the game area 30 is formed between the inner guide surface and the outer guide surface 531.
In particular, in the rail base 520, the guide surface 521 becomes a joint surface that contacts the outer peripheral surface of the outer rail 530. As a result, if a pin mark PS is formed on the guide surface 521, when the outer rail 530 is attached to the guide surface 521, the outer rail 530 may be curved (protruding or recessed) at a position that overlaps with the pin mark PS in the longitudinal direction of the outer rail 530, and the trajectory of the game ball launched along the outer guide surface 531 may become irregular. Therefore, in this embodiment, the pin mark PS is arranged in the rail base 520 at a position that avoids the guide surface 521. In other words, the pin mark PS is not arranged on the guide surface 521.
Furthermore, the back surface of the rail base 520 becomes the joint surface that comes into contact with the front surface of the game board 11. As a result, if a convex pin mark PS is formed on the back surface of the rail base 520, when the rail base 520 is attached to the game board 11, a gap will be generated between the front surface of the game board 11 and the back surface of the rail base 520, and the attachment of the rail base 520 to the game board 11 may be incomplete. Therefore, in this embodiment, the pin mark PS is arranged in the rail base 520 at a position that avoids the back surface. In other words, the pin mark PS is not arranged on the back surface of the rail base 520.
In this embodiment, the pin mark PS is disposed on the front surface of the rail base 520. In this case, the pin mark PS disposed on the front surface of the rail base 520 is formed in a concave shape. In particular, during molding using a mold, a recess (hole) is formed on the front surface of the rail base 520, and the pin mark PS is disposed inside the recess. This makes it possible to prevent the pin mark PS from interfering with the transparent plate 4a.
In this embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a concave pin mark PS is disposed on the back surface of the rail base 520. In particular, a concave portion (hole portion) may be formed on the back surface of the rail base 520 during molding using a mold, and the pin mark PS may be disposed inside the concave portion.
As described above, in the rail base 520 according to the fourth embodiment, the pin marks PS are arranged on the front surface of the rail base 520. This makes it possible to prevent the rail base 520 from being incompletely attached to the game board 11, and also makes it possible to prevent the outer rail 530 attached to the rail base 520 from being curved.

Example 5
Next, a description will be given of a fifth embodiment of the present invention. The fifth embodiment is an example in which the present invention is applied to a decorative member 700.
Figure 65 is a perspective view of decorative member 700. Figure 65(a) shows the front side of decorative member 700, and Figure 65(b) shows the back side of decorative member 700.
The decorative member 700 is placed on the front side of the game board 11, the front side of the decorative portion 4b, etc., for the purpose of decorating the pachinko machine 1.
As shown in Fig. 65, the decorative member 700 is formed in a box shape (approximately a cube shape) with an open (apertured) back side. Specifically, the decorative member 700 includes a front plate 710 and an outer peripheral plate 720 that is provided so as to rise from the back side of the front plate 710 toward the back side.
Various decorations (designs) are applied to the front surface of the front panel 710. The decorative member 700 is a molded product made of resin. In particular, the decorative member 700 is made of a transparent or translucent material.
Here, if pin marks PS are arranged on the back surface of the front plate 710, which is made of a transparent or translucent material, the pin marks PS may be seen by the player, which may reduce the design quality of the decorative member 700. Therefore, in this embodiment, the pin marks PS are arranged on the end surface (the end surface facing the back surface) of the outer peripheral plate 720. Note that, if a rib is provided on the back surface of the front plate 710 so as to rise from the back surface of the front plate 710 toward the back surface, the pin marks PS may be arranged on the end surface (the end surface facing the back surface) of the rib.
In particular, in the decorative member 700, the end face of the outer peripheral plate 720 (or rib) becomes a joining surface that contacts the surface of other members such as the front of the game board 11 and the front of the decorative part 4b. As a result, if a convex pin mark PS is formed on the end face of the outer peripheral plate 720 (or rib), when the decorative member 700 is attached to the other member, a gap is generated between the surface of the other member and the end face of the outer peripheral plate 720 (or rib), and the attachment of the decorative member 700 to the other member may be incomplete. Therefore, in this embodiment, the pin mark PS arranged on the end face of the outer peripheral plate 720 (or rib) is made concave. In particular, during molding with a mold, a recess (hole) is formed on the end face of the outer peripheral plate 720 (or rib), and the pin mark PS is arranged inside the recess. This makes it possible to prevent the decorative member 700 from being incompletely attached to the other member.
As described above, in the decorative member 700 according to Example 5, the pin marks PS are arranged on the end face of the outer peripheral plate 720 (or the rib). This makes it difficult to visually recognize the pin marks PS, even if the decorative member 700 is made of a transparent or translucent material, and makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the design of the decorative member 700 is reduced.

(Example 6)
Next, a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described. The sixth embodiment is an example in which the present invention is applied to an attacker unit.
The attacker unit (not shown) constitutes a part of the game board 11. Inside the attacker unit, a plurality of game ball passages are formed as passages through which game balls flow (hereinafter, referred to as "game ball passages"). The plurality of game ball passages constitute a part of the right-side path.
The attacker unit includes a base member and a cover member disposed on the front side of the base member.
The base member is a molded product made of resin. The base member is formed in a flat plate shape. The front surface of the base member forms a part of the board surface. In particular, the front surface of the base member defines (forms) the rear side of a plurality of game ball passages. The base member is provided with various ball entry ports (e.g., second large entry port 55).
The cover member is a molded product made of resin. The cover member is made of a transparent or semi-transparent material so that the game balls passing through each game ball passage can be visually confirmed. The cover member includes a front plate and a partition wall provided on the back surface of the front plate.
The front plate is formed in a flat plate shape. The back surface of the front plate defines the front side of the plurality of game ball passages. In this embodiment, various decorations (designs) are applied to the front surface of the front plate.
The partition wall is provided so as to rise from the rear surface of the front plate toward the rear surface side. The side surface of the partition wall partitions the side surface side of the plurality of game ball passages. That is, in the attacker unit, the partition wall partitions (forms) the plurality of game ball passages in the area between the front surface of the base member and the rear surface of the front plate.
Here, if the cover member is made of a transparent or translucent material, and the pin marks PS are arranged on the front side of the front plate, the pin marks PS may be seen by the player when he/she visually checks the game ball passing through the game ball passage, which may reduce the design of the attacker unit. Also, if the base member is made of a transparent or translucent material, and the pin marks PS are arranged on the surface behind the inner surface of the game passage (specifically, the back surface of the base member) when viewed from the front side, the pin marks PS may be seen by the player when he/she visually checks the game ball passing through the game ball passage, which may reduce the design of the attacker unit.
Therefore, in the attacker unit, the pin marks PS are arranged at a position that avoids the inner surface of the game ball passage, the front surface of the front plate, and the surface that is the back side of the inner surface of the passage when viewed from the front side (specifically, the back surface of the base member). For example, the pin marks PS are arranged on the end faces of the ribs provided on the front plate and the base member. This makes it difficult to see the pin marks PS, and makes it possible to prevent a situation in which the design of the attacker unit is deteriorated.
Here, in cases where the end faces of the ribs provided on the front plate/base member are to become joining surfaces that come into contact with other members, it is preferable that the pin marks PS placed on the end faces of the ribs have a concave shape. In particular, it is preferable that a recess (hole) is formed on the end face of the rib during molding using a mold, and the pin marks PS are placed inside the recess.
In addition, when the attacker unit (particularly the cover member or base member) is made of a non-transparent resin material, the pin marks PS may be arranged on the surface behind the inner surface of the game ball passage when viewed from the front side (specifically, the back surface of the base member). This makes it possible to improve the freedom of arrangement of the pin marks PS while making them difficult to see, and suppresses a decrease in the design of the attacker unit.
Furthermore, when the attacker unit (particularly the cover member) is made of a non-transparent resin material, the pin marks PS may be arranged at a position on the back surface of the front panel that avoids the area that becomes the inner surface of the game ball passage. This improves the freedom of arrangement of the pin marks PS while making them difficult to see, and makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the design of the attacker unit.

Other Examples
For molded products made of resin that can be touched by the player (for example, can be operated by the player) (such as the performance button 5b, rotary selector c, launch handle 6, and receiving tray 5a), the pin marks PS are placed in a position that avoids the parts of the molded product that can be touched by the player. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a player who touches the molded product feels uncomfortable.
The other embodiments may be combined with the configurations according to the first to sixth embodiments.

(Regarding gaming machine status)
In the pachinko machine 1, six gaming machine states are defined (specifically, a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, and a backup abnormal state).
The RAM 230 of the main control board 200 is provided with a gaming machine state flag area. In the gaming machine state flag area, a value corresponding to one of six gaming machine states (specifically, a playable state, a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, and a backup abnormal state) is stored (set) as a gaming machine state flag. Then, in the pachinko machine 1, a gaming machine state corresponding to the value stored in the gaming machine state flag area is generated.

The "playable state" is a state of the gaming machine in which game progress is possible.
During the playable state, the execution of the processes in steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is permitted, which allows the game (normal game and special game) to proceed.
During the playable state, the base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206. Also, information related to the game is displayed on the main display device 60.

The "setting change state" is a gaming machine state in which the setting values stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 can be changed.
The setting change state occurs when the setting change conditions are met. In this embodiment, the setting change conditions are met when a detection signal is input from the inner frame open sensor 108, a detection signal is input from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal is input from the RAM clear switch 207 when the power is turned on. In other words, when the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is turned to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, when the power is turned on, the setting change state occurs.
During the setting change state, the execution of the processes in steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
During the setting change state, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. All lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
Furthermore, while the setting change state is occurring, it is possible to change the setting values stored in the setting value area by pressing the RAM clear switch 207. Then, when the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the setting change state is replaced by a playable state, whereby the setting values stored in the setting value area are confirmed.

The "setting confirmation state" is a gaming machine state in which it is possible to confirm the setting values stored in the setting value area of RAM 230.
The setting confirmation state occurs when the setting confirmation conditions are met. In this embodiment, the setting confirmation conditions are met when a detection signal is input from the inner frame open sensor 108, a detection signal is input from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal is not input from the RAM clear switch 207 when the power is turned on. In other words, the setting confirmation state occurs when the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is turned to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is not pressed when the power is turned on.
During the setting confirmation state, the execution of the processes in steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Furthermore, while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area are displayed on the performance display device 206. This makes it possible to confirm the setting values stored in the setting value area. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
It should be noted that while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting values stored in the setting value area cannot be changed.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting confirmation state is occurring, the setting confirmation state is replaced with a playable state.

The "setting abnormality state" refers to the state of the gaming machine in which a setting abnormality has occurred.
The setting abnormal state occurs when, during a playable state, it is determined that the setting value set in the setting value area is not within a specified range.
During the occurrence of the setting abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
During the occurrence of the setting abnormality, an error code designating the occurrence of the setting abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. All lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
To recover from the abnormal setting state, it is necessary to perform a power-off and power-on to cause a setting change state.

"RAM abnormal state" refers to the state of the gaming machine in which a RAM abnormality has occurred.
The RAM abnormal state occurs when it is determined that a read/write abnormality has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
During the occurrence of the RAM abnormal state, the execution of the processes in steps S4-9 to S4-18 described later is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Furthermore, when a RAM abnormality occurs, an error code designating the occurrence of a RAM abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
To recover from a RAM abnormality, it is necessary to perform a power-off and power-on to cause a setting change state.

The "backup abnormality state" is a gaming machine state in which a backup abnormality has occurred.
The backup abnormality state occurs when it is determined that a backup abnormality (specifically, an abnormality in the backup flag or an abnormality in the checksum) has occurred in the RAM 230 when the power is turned on.
During the occurrence of the backup abnormal state, the execution of the processes of steps S4-9 to S4-18 described below is prohibited, and the game (specifically, the normal game and the special game) is stopped.
Furthermore, when a backup abnormality occurs, an error code designating the occurrence of a backup abnormality is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, all lighting elements constituting the main display device 60 are turned off. Furthermore, security information (external information) is output to an external device.
In order to recover from the backup abnormal state, it is necessary to perform a power off and power on to cause a setting change state.

(Regarding setting values)
Next, the setting values (setting information) set in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
The "set value" is information that specifies the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery). In this embodiment, the set value is specified to be a value of "0" to "5".
A set value area is provided in the RAM 230 of the main control board 200. In the set value area, one of the values "0" to "5" is stored (set) as a set value. The probability of winning the special symbol lottery is set to a probability according to the value set in the set value area.
In this embodiment, the probability of winning a "big win" through the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery and second special pattern lottery) changes according to the value set in the set value area. On the other hand, the probability of winning a "small win" through the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery and second special pattern lottery) does not change according to the value set in the set value area. Note that the probability of winning a "small win" through the special pattern lottery may be configured to change according to the value set in the set value area, just like the probability of winning a "big win" through the special pattern lottery.
The winning probability of the special pattern lottery corresponding to each setting value (probability of winning the "jackpot") is, in order from highest to lowest, as follows: winning probability corresponding to setting value = "5", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "4", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "3", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "2", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "1", winning probability corresponding to setting value = "0" (high winning probability → low winning probability).

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to change (select) the setting value stored in the setting value area during the setting change state. Here, the change of the setting value is executed by the manager of the pachinko machine 1 (such as an employee of the game center where the pachinko machine 1 is installed).
That is, as described above, when the power is turned on, if the inner frame unit 3 is open, the key switch 208 is rotated to the ON state, and the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, a setting change state is generated.
When the setting change state occurs, the setting value stored in the setting value area is displayed on the performance display device 206. Furthermore, each time the RAM clear switch 207 is pressed, the setting value stored in the setting value area is changed. At this time, if the setting value set in the setting value area is changed, the setting value displayed on the performance display device 206 is also changed accordingly.
When the key switch 208 is rotated to the OFF state while the setting change state is occurring, the setting change state is replaced with a playable state, whereby the setting value stored in the setting value area is finalized.

(Base ratio)
In the pachinko machine 1, while a playable state occurs, a base ratio (base value) is calculated by the CPU 210. In this embodiment, the base ratio is calculated only while a predetermined play state occurs (specifically, while a special low probability state occurs and while time-saving control is stopped).
During the playable state, the calculated base ratio is displayed on the performance display device 206.
The "base ratio" is information calculated based on the number of game balls shot into the game area 30 and the number of prize balls paid out in response to the game balls entering predetermined entry ports (in this embodiment, the starting ports 51-53 and the other winning ports 56, 57a-57c). Specifically, the base ratio is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts (the number of prize balls paid out) to the number of out balls (the number of game balls shot out).

In this embodiment, the base ratio for each predetermined interval (period) is calculated. As the predetermined interval, a interval is defined in which a predetermined number of out balls (60,000 balls in this embodiment) are detected (discharged). That is, each interval is started in response to the end of the previous interval, and is ended in response to the number of out balls detected during the current interval reaching the predetermined number (60,000 balls). The CPU 210 then calculates the base ratio at any time (in real time) during each interval.
Note that a predetermined time may be defined as the predetermined section. That is, the CPU 210 may be configured to calculate the base ratio for each predetermined time.
The "number of out balls" refers to the number of out balls. An "out ball" refers to a game ball that has been discharged from the game area 30. Specifically, an out ball is a game ball that has passed through the discharge path (a game ball detected by the out switch 109).
The game ball discharged from the outlet 58 may be regarded as the out ball. Specifically, the out switch 109 may be configured to detect only the game ball discharged from the outlet 58, and the game ball detected by the out switch 109 may be regarded as the out ball.
The "number of payouts" refers to the total number of prize balls paid out in response to game balls entering the start holes 51 to 53 and the other winning holes 56, 57a to 57c.

(Regarding game status)
Next, the game states defined in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the contents of the game state.
In the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to execute time-saving control as auxiliary control that is advantageous to the player.
During the execution of the time-saving control, the probability of winning the "normal pattern win" is improved by the normal pattern lottery described later, compared to when the time-saving control is stopped. In other words, when the time-saving control is stopped, the normal pattern is in a low probability state, and when the time-saving control is executed, the normal pattern is in a high probability state.
During the time-saving control is stopped (during the occurrence of a low probability state of a normal symbol), the probability of winning a "normal symbol win" by the normal symbol lottery is set to a first probability. On the other hand, during the time-saving control is being executed (during the occurrence of a high probability state of a normal symbol), the probability of winning a "normal symbol win" by the normal symbol lottery is set to a second probability higher than the first probability.
In addition, during the execution of the time-saving control, the time for displaying the variable display of the normal symbol is shortened compared to when the time-saving control is stopped, and in the normal winning game state described later, the number of times the normal electric device 53a is opened is increased and the opening time of the normal electric device 53a is extended. Furthermore, during the execution of the time-saving control, the time for displaying the variable display of the special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "variation time") is shortened compared to when the time-saving control is stopped.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a special pattern low probability state and a special pattern high probability state are defined as game states related to the probability of winning the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery and second special pattern lottery) described below.
The probability of winning a "jackpot" through the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery and second special pattern lottery) changes depending on whether a special pattern low probability state is occurring or a special pattern high probability state is occurring.
That is, during the occurrence of the special pattern low probability state, the probability of winning the "jackpot" through the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery or second special pattern lottery) is set to a first probability (probability according to a set value). On the other hand, during the occurrence of the special pattern high probability state, the probability of winning the "jackpot" through the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery or second special pattern lottery) is set to a second probability (probability according to a set value) higher than the first probability.
On the other hand, the probability of winning a "small win" through the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery and second special pattern lottery) does not change whether a special pattern low probability state is occurring or a special pattern high probability state is occurring.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 5, four game states (specifically, "game state A" to "game state D") are defined in the pachinko machine 1.
"Game state A" is a game state in which the time-saving control is stopped (a low probability state of normal winning is occurring) and a low probability state of special winning is occurring.
"Game state B" is a game state in which time-saving control is being executed (a normal high probability state is occurring) and a special high probability state is occurring.
"Game state C" is a game state in which the time-saving control is stopped (a low probability state of normal winning is occurring) and a high probability state of special winning is occurring.
"Game state D" is a game state in which time-saving control is being executed (a high probability state of normal winning is occurring) and a low probability state of special winning is occurring.

(Regarding various lotteries)
Next, various lotteries executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
Fig. 6 is a diagram showing the winning probabilities of various lotteries. Fig. 7 is a diagram showing the winning types of various lotteries.
FIG. 6(a) shows the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery, FIG. 6(b) shows the winning probability of the first special symbol lottery, and FIG. 6(c) shows the winning probability of the second special symbol lottery.
In addition, Figure 7(a) shows the winning type (type of "jackpot pattern") selected when a "jackpot" is won by the first special pattern lottery, and Figure 7(b) shows the winning type (type of "jackpot pattern") selected when a "jackpot" is won by the second special pattern lottery.

(Regular design lottery)
In the pachinko machine 1, a regular symbol lottery is executed when the game ball passes through a start gate 41.
In the pachinko machine 1, the results of the normal symbol lottery are defined as "normal symbol hit" and "miss."
As shown in Figure 6 (a), in a normal pattern lottery (determination of whether a normal pattern is a hit or a loss) that is executed while the time-saving control is stopped (while a low probability state of a normal pattern is occurring), the probability of being determined to be a "normal hit" (a win) is 1/65536.
On the other hand, in the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern winning/losing determination) that is executed while the time-saving control is being executed (while the normal pattern high probability state is occurring), the probability of being determined to be a "normal pattern winning" (winning) is 1/1 (or approximately 1/1).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, only "normal winning pattern 1" is specified as the winning type (type of normal winning pattern) to be selected when a "normal winning pattern" is won in the normal pattern lottery.
When the "regular winning pattern 1" is won, the regular pattern display device is controlled to stop and display the regular pattern at "regular winning pattern 1".
On the other hand, if the player loses the regular symbol lottery (in the case of a "lose" result), the regular symbol display device is controlled to stop and display the regular symbol as a "lose symbol."
When the "normal winning symbol 1" is selected, a normal winning game state is generated. In the normal winning game state, the normal electric device 53a is displaced (opened) from a closed state to an open state, and the game ball can enter the third starting hole 53.
In the normal winning game state, the number of times the normal electric device 53a opens is set to 1 [time] or 3 [times], and the opening time of the normal electric device 53a each time is set to 0.5 [s] or 2.0 [s].
At this time, while the time-saving control is being executed, the number of times that the normal electric device 53a is opened is set to 3 times, and the opening time of the normal electric device 53a for each opening is set to 2.0 seconds.
On the other hand, while the time-saving control is stopped, the number of times the normal electric device 53a is opened is set to 1 [time], and the opening time of the normal electric device 53a for each opening is set to 0.5 [s].

(Special design lottery)
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a first special pattern lottery is executed when a game ball enters the first starting hole 51, and a second special pattern lottery is executed when a game ball enters the second starting hole 52 or the third starting hole 53.
In the pachinko machine 1, the results of the first special symbol lottery are stipulated as "big win", "small win", and "loss". On the other hand, the results of the second special symbol lottery are stipulated as "big win", "small win", and "loss".
In addition, the first special pattern lottery may be configured so that a "small win" cannot be won.

As shown in Figures 6(b) and (c), in the pachinko machine 1, the probability of winning a "big win" through the special pattern drawing (first special pattern drawing and second special pattern drawing) is 1/319 (varies according to the set value) when a special pattern low probability state is occurring, and is 1/136 (varies according to the set value) when a special pattern high probability state is occurring. Also, the probability of winning a "small win" through the first special pattern drawing is 1/50. Furthermore, the probability of winning a "small win" through the second special pattern drawing is 1/10.
Here, as described above, the probability of winning the "jackpot" through the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) varies depending on the set value. Note that the probability of winning the "jackpot" through the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) may be configured not to vary depending on the set value.

As shown in Figure 7 (a), in pachinko machine 1, "jackpot pattern 1" and "jackpot pattern 2" are specified as winning types (types of jackpot patterns) to be selected when a "jackpot" is won through the first special pattern lottery.
On the other hand, as shown in Figure 7 (b), "jackpot pattern 3" to "jackpot pattern 5" are specified as the winning types (types of jackpot patterns) to be selected when a "jackpot" is won by the second special pattern lottery.
In addition, only "small win pattern 1" is specified as the winning type (type of small win pattern) to be selected when a "small win" is won by the first special pattern lottery or the second special pattern lottery.

When the "jackpot pattern 1" is selected, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "jackpot pattern 1" is displayed in a stopped state in the special pattern 1 display device. Also, in the performance pattern display area A, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "chance pattern" is displayed in a stopped state.
Here, the "chance pattern" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 is a "number pattern" showing the same even numbers, such as "2, 2, 2," and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 is a predetermined color.
When the "jackpot pattern 2" is selected, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "jackpot pattern 2" is displayed in a stopped state in the special pattern 1 display device. Also, in the performance pattern display area A, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "chance pattern" is displayed in a stopped state.

When the "jackpot pattern 3" is selected, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "jackpot pattern 3" is displayed in a stopped state in the special pattern 2 display device. Also, in the performance pattern display area B, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "rush pattern" is displayed in a stopped state.
Here, the "rush pattern" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 is a "number pattern" showing specific numbers, such as "7, 7, 7," and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 shows a predetermined color.
When the "jackpot pattern 4" is selected, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "jackpot pattern 4" is displayed in a stopped state in the special pattern 2 display device. Also, in the performance pattern display area B, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "variable pattern" is displayed in a stopped state.
Here, the "probable bonus pattern" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 is a "number pattern" showing the same odd numbers, such as "3, 3, 3," and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 shows a predetermined color.

When the "jackpot pattern 5" is selected, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "jackpot pattern 5" is displayed in a stopped state in the special pattern 2 display device. Also, in the performance pattern display area B, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "normal pattern" is displayed in a stopped state.
Here, the "normal pattern" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 is a "number pattern" showing the same even numbers, such as "4, 4, 4," and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 shows a predetermined color.

On the other hand, when the "small win pattern 1" is won, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "small win pattern 1" is stopped and displayed on the special pattern display device (special pattern 1 display device or special pattern 2 display device). Also, in the performance pattern display areas A and B, the stop pattern (display mode) corresponding to the "small win pattern" is stopped and displayed.
Here, the "small winning pattern" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed at the lottery result display position of the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 is a combination having a predetermined regularity, such as "1, 2, 3," and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 shows a predetermined color.
On the other hand, if the player loses the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery) (in the case of a "lose"), the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "lose symbol" is displayed on the special symbol display device (special symbol 1 display device or special symbol 2 display device). Also, the stop symbol (display mode) corresponding to the "lose symbol" is displayed on the performance symbol display areas A and B.
Here, a "losing pattern" is, for example, a display mode in which the first performance pattern z1 stopped and displayed in the three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 has a combination of numbers, such as "1, 6, 9," that is different from the numbers indicated by the "number pattern" stopped and displayed in at least one area and the "number pattern" stopped and displayed in the other areas, and the second performance pattern z2 stopped and displayed in the second performance pattern display area a4 has a predetermined color.

When the "jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 5" are selected, a jackpot game state is generated. In the jackpot game state, the first special electric device 54a is shifted from a closed state to an open state, and the game ball can enter the first big winning hole 54.
Specifically, during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, a predetermined number of rounds of play are executed. In this embodiment, when the "jackpot pattern 1" to the "jackpot pattern 5" are won, the number of rounds of play is set to 6 [times].
In addition, if any of "jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 5" is won, the maximum opening time of the first special electric device 54a in each round of play is set to a predetermined time (29.0 [s] in this embodiment).
Each round of play is ended when one of the following conditions is met: (1) the longest opening time has elapsed since the first special electric device 54a was opened, and (2) the number of game balls entering the first large prize opening 54 during the execution of that round of play has reached a predetermined upper limit (10 balls in this embodiment).

If "jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 5" are selected, the first of the predetermined number of rounds executed during the jackpot game state will be a "V round."
In the "V round game", the distribution means is shifted from a non-V passing state to a V passing state.
In this case, if "jackpot pattern 1" or "jackpot pattern 5" is won, the distribution means is shifted from a non-V passing state to a V passing state in such a manner that it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball that enters the first large winning opening 54 during the V-round game to pass through the V area.
As a result, when "jackpot pattern 1" or "jackpot pattern 5" is won, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the jackpot game state. Therefore, "jackpot pattern 1" or "jackpot pattern 5" is a winning type in which the special pattern high probability state is not generated after the jackpot game state ends.

On the other hand, if "jackpot pattern 2" to "jackpot pattern 4" are won, the distribution means is shifted from a non-V passing state to a V passing state in such a manner that it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball that enters the first large winning opening 54 during the V-round game to pass through the V area.
As a result, if "jackpot pattern 2" to "jackpot pattern 4" are selected, the game ball can easily (possibly) pass through the V area during the jackpot game state. Therefore, "jackpot pattern 2" to "jackpot pattern 4" are the winning types that can cause a special pattern high probability state after the jackpot game state ends.
Here, among the predetermined number of round games executed during the occurrence of the jackpot game state, in the round games other than the V round game, the distribution means is not shifted from the non-V passing state to the V passing state. This makes it impossible for the game ball that enters the first big prize opening 54 during the execution of the round games other than the V round game to pass through the V area.

If the passage of the game ball through the V region is not detected during the occurrence of a jackpot game state, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is set to a special low probability state.
On the other hand, if the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the occurrence of a jackpot game state, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is determined to be a special chart high probability state.
In other words, if "jackpot pattern 1" or "jackpot pattern 5" is won, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball that entered the first big prize opening 54 to pass through the V area during the V round game. As a result, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state becomes a special pattern low probability state.

On the other hand, if "jackpot pattern 2" to "jackpot pattern 4" are won, the game ball that entered the first big prize winning hole 54 can easily (possibly) pass through the V area during the V round game. As a result, the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is usually a special pattern high probability state.
The special symbol high probability state is initiated in response to the end of a jackpot game state, and is terminated in response to the establishment of one of the following conditions: (1) the number of special symbol hit determinations executed during the occurrence of the special symbol high probability state (the number of times the notification display of the special symbol is executed during the occurrence of the special symbol high probability state) has reached a predetermined number of chance changes (in this embodiment, 10,000 times) (the number of times the variable display of the special symbol initiated during the occurrence of the special symbol high probability state has reached a predetermined number of chance changes); and (2) the start of the next jackpot game state (the stopped display of the "jackpot symbol" has ended).
Here, when the condition (1) is satisfied, the special pattern high probability state is terminated at the start of the variable display of the special pattern for the predetermined number of times of the probability change. On the other hand, when the condition (2) is satisfied, the special pattern high probability state is terminated at the end of the stop display of the "jackpot pattern" (when the stop time has elapsed).

Furthermore, a predetermined number of time-saving operations is set at the end of the big win gaming state. Then, after the end of the big win gaming state, the time-saving control is executed according to the set number of time-saving operations.
As shown in Fig. 7(a), when "jackpot pattern 1" or "jackpot pattern 2" is hit, the number of time-saving times is set to 10000 times or 100 times. In this case, when the passage of the game ball through the V area during the jackpot game state is detected, the number of time-saving times is set to 10000 times, and when the passage of the game ball through the V area during the jackpot game state is not detected, the number of time-saving times is set to 100 times.
On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 7(b), when "jackpot pattern 3" is hit, the number of time-saving times is set to 0 or 100. In this case, when the passage of the game ball through the V area during the jackpot game state is detected, the number of time-saving times is set to 0, and when the passage of the game ball through the V area during the jackpot game state is not detected, the number of time-saving times is set to 100.
On the other hand, when "jackpot pattern 4" or "jackpot pattern 5" is hit, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000 times or 100 times. In this case, if the passage of the game ball through the V area during the jackpot game state is detected, the number of time-saving times is set to 10,000 times, and if the passage of the game ball through the V area during the jackpot game state is not detected, the number of time-saving times is set to 100 times.

When the number of time-saving times is set to 0, the time-saving control is not executed after the end of the big win game state. On the other hand, when the number of time-saving times is set to 1 or more, the time-saving control is executed after the end of the big win game state.
The time-saving control is initiated in response to the end of a jackpot game state, and is terminated in response to the establishment of one of the following conditions: (1) the number of special symbol hit determinations executed during the time-saving control (the number of times the notification display of the special symbol is executed during the time-saving control) reaches the set number of time-saving times (the number of times the variable display of the special symbol initiated during the time-saving control reaches the set number of time-saving times); and (2) the start of the next jackpot game state (the stopped display of the "jackpot symbol" has ended).
Here, if the condition (1) is satisfied, the time-saving control is terminated at the start of the variable display of the special symbol for the set time-saving number of times. On the other hand, if the condition (2) is satisfied, the time-saving control is terminated at the end of the stopped display of the "jackpot symbol" (when the stop time has elapsed).

When the "small win pattern 1" is selected, a small win game state is generated. In the small win game state, the second special electric device 55a is displaced from a closed state to an open state, and the game ball can enter the second large winning hole 55.
Specifically, during the occurrence of the small win game state, a predetermined number of small win games are executed. In this embodiment, when the "small win pattern 1" is won, the number of small win games is set to 1 [time].
In addition, when the "small win pattern 1" is won, the maximum opening time of the second special electric device 55a in each small win game is set to a predetermined time (1.8 [s] in this embodiment).
Furthermore, when the "small win pattern 1" is won, the second large winning hole 55 is opened in each small win game. That is, in each small win game, the second special electric device 55a is shifted from a closed state to an open state, and the game ball can enter the second large winning hole 55.
Each small win game is ended when one of the following conditions is met: the longest opening time has elapsed since the second special electric device 55a was opened, and the number of game balls entering the second large winning port 55 during the small win game has reached a predetermined upper limit (8 balls in this embodiment).
In this embodiment, the game state (execution status of time-saving control) does not change before and after a small win game state.

(Special symbol fluctuation time)
Next, the variation time of the special symbols selected and set during the occurrence of each game state ("game state A" to "game state D") will be described.
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the variation time of the special symbols selected and set during each game state.
In addition, Figure 8(a) shows the change time of the special pattern selected and set when "game state A" occurs, Figure 8(b) shows the change time of the special pattern selected and set when "game state B" occurs, Figure 8(c) shows the change time of the special pattern selected and set when "game state C" occurs, and Figure 8(d) shows the change time of the special pattern selected and set when "game state D" occurs.

The change time (change mode/change pattern) of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) at the time of "jackpot" is selected by a winning change pattern determination process described later. In the winning change pattern determination process, the change time (change mode/change pattern) of the special symbol is selected based on the reserved type (special symbol 1 game information or special symbol 2 game information), the game state ("game state A" to "game state D"), and the type of the stopped symbol.
On the other hand, the change time (change mode/change pattern) of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) at the time of "miss" is selected by a change pattern determination process at the time of losing, which will be described later. In the change pattern determination process at the time of losing, the change time (change mode/change pattern) of the special symbol is selected based on the reserved type (special symbol 1 game information or special symbol 2 game information), the reserved number (special symbol 1 reserved number or special symbol 2 reserved number), and the game state ("game state A" to "game state D").
On the other hand, the change time (change mode/change pattern) of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) at the time of "small win" is selected by either the winning change pattern determination process or the losing change pattern determination process. At this time, based on the game state ("game state A" to "game state D") and the reserved type (special symbol 1 game information or special symbol 2 game information), either the winning change pattern determination process or the losing change pattern determination process is selected.
This eliminates the need for dedicated processing to determine the change time (change mode/change pattern) of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) when a "small hit" occurs, making it possible to simplify the processing.

Specifically, as shown in Fig. 8(a), when the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state A" is "small hit", the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is selected by the loss time fluctuation pattern judgment process. This makes it possible to make the mode (content) of the fluctuation presentation the same whether the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state A" is "small hit" or "miss".
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state A" is "small hit", the winning time change pattern judgment process selects the change time of the second special symbol. This makes it possible to make the mode (content) of the change presentation the same whether the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state A" is "small hit" or "big hit".

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 8(b), when the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state B" is "small hit", the winning time change pattern judgment process selects the change time of the first special symbol. This makes it possible to make the mode (content) of the change presentation the same whether the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state B" is "small hit" or "big hit".
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state B" is "small hit", the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is selected by the loss time fluctuation pattern judgment process. This makes it possible to make the mode (content) of the fluctuation presentation the same whether the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state B" is "small hit" or "miss".

On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 8(c), when the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state C" is "small hit", the first special symbol fluctuation time is selected by the winning time fluctuation pattern judgment process. This makes it possible to make the mode (content) of the fluctuation presentation the same when the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state C" is "small hit" or "big hit".
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state C" is "small hit", the winning time change pattern judgment process selects the change time of the second special symbol. This makes it possible to make the mode (content) of the change presentation the same whether the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state C" is "small hit" or "big hit".
On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 8(d), when the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state D" is "small hit", the first special symbol fluctuation time is selected by the winning time fluctuation pattern judgment process. This makes it possible to make the mode (content) of the fluctuation presentation the same when the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 1 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state D" is "small hit" or "big hit".
On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state D" is "small hit", the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is selected by the loss time fluctuation pattern judgment process. This makes it possible to make the mode (content) of the fluctuation presentation the same whether the result of the special symbol hit judgment based on the special symbol 2 game information executed during the occurrence of "game state D" is "small hit" or "miss".

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the groups of the fluctuation modes (combinations of fluctuation modes and fluctuation patterns) of the special symbols are defined as "normal fluctuation,""longfluctuation,""shortfluctuation," and "exclusive fluctuation."
"Normal fluctuation" is a group to which fluctuation modes that correspond to normal fluctuation times belong. In this embodiment, 4.0 [s] to 180.0 [s] are specified as the fluctuation times (normal fluctuation times) corresponding to each fluctuation mode belonging to "normal fluctuation."
The "long fluctuation" is a group to which fluctuation modes that are associated with a long fluctuation time (hereinafter referred to as "long fluctuation time") compared to fluctuation modes that belong to other groups belong. In this embodiment, 590.0 [s] is specified as the fluctuation time (long fluctuation time) corresponding to each fluctuation mode that belongs to the "long fluctuation".
The "short fluctuation" is a group to which fluctuation modes that correspond to a short fluctuation time (hereinafter, "short fluctuation time") compared to the normal fluctuation time belong. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time (short fluctuation time) corresponding to each fluctuation mode belonging to the "short fluctuation" is specified to be 3.0 [s] to 10.0 [s].
The "exclusive variation" is a variation mode exclusive to the case where a "small win" or a "miss" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed during the occurrence of the "game state C". In this embodiment, the variation time corresponding to each variation mode belonging to the "exclusive variation" is specified as 1.0 [s] to 10.0 [s].
As shown in FIG. 8(a), when the result of the special pattern hit judgment based on the special pattern 1 game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state A" is "big hit", "small hit", or "miss", "normal fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time is within the range of 4.0 [s] to 180.0 [s]. At this time, when the result of the special pattern hit judgment is "big hit", the fluctuation mode corresponding to "big hit" (within the range of fluctuation time = 120.0 [s] to 180.0 [s]) among the fluctuation modes belonging to "normal fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation mode. On the other hand, when the result of the special pattern hit judgment is "small hit" or "miss", the fluctuation mode corresponding to "miss" (within the range of fluctuation time = 4.0 [s] to 180.0 [s]) among the fluctuation modes belonging to "normal fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation mode.
On the other hand, if the result of the special winning judgment based on the special winning information 2 during the occurrence of "game state A" is "big win", "small win" or "miss", "long fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time becomes 590.0 [s].
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8(b), when the result of the special winning judgment based on the special winning information 1 during the occurrence of "game state B" is "big win", "small win" or "miss", "long fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time becomes 590.0 [s].
On the other hand, if the result of the special winning judgment based on the special winning game information executed during the occurrence of "game state B" is "jackpot", "normal variation" (a variation mode corresponding to "jackpot" among the variation modes belonging to "normal variation") is selected as the variation mode. This causes the variation time to be within the range of 120.0 [s] to 180.0 [s].
On the other hand, if the result of the special winning judgment based on the special winning information 2 during the occurrence of "game state B" is "small winning" or "miss", "short fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time is within the range of 3.0 [s] to 10.0 [s].
On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 8(c), when the result of the special winning judgment based on the special winning information 1 during the occurrence of "game state C" is "big win", "small win" or "miss", "long fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time becomes 590.0 [s].
On the other hand, if the result of the special winning judgment based on the special winning game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state C" is "jackpot", the "normal variation" (a variation mode corresponding to "jackpot" among the variation modes belonging to "normal variation") is selected as the variation mode. This causes the variation time to be within the range of 120.0 [s] to 180.0 [s].
On the other hand, if the result of the special winning judgment based on the special winning information 2 during the occurrence of "game state C" is "small winning" or "miss", "exclusive variation" is selected as the variation mode. This causes the variation time to be within the range of 1.0 [s] to 10.0 [s].
On the other hand, as shown in Fig. 8(d), when the result of the special winning judgment based on the special winning information 1 during the occurrence of "game state D" is "big win", "small win" or "miss", "long fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time becomes 590.0 [s].
On the other hand, if the result of the special winning judgment based on the special winning game information executed during the occurrence of the "game state D" is "jackpot", the "normal variation" (a variation mode corresponding to "jackpot" among the variation modes belonging to "normal variation") is selected as the variation mode. This causes the variation time to be within the range of 120.0 [s] to 180.0 [s].
On the other hand, if the result of the special winning judgment based on the special winning information 2 during the occurrence of "game state D" is "small winning" or "miss", "short fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation mode. As a result, the fluctuation time is within the range of 3.0 [s] to 10.0 [s].

(Regarding transition of game state)
Next, the transition of the game state will be described.
As shown in Figure 7 (a), if "jackpot pattern 1" or "jackpot pattern 2" is won based on the first special pattern lottery, and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the jackpot game state, the game state after the jackpot game state ends will be "game state B."
On the other hand, if "jackpot pattern 1" or "jackpot pattern 2" is won based on the first special pattern lottery, and the passage of the game ball through the V area is not detected during the jackpot game state, the game state after the jackpot game state ends will be "game state D."
Here, as described above, if the "jackpot symbol 1" is selected, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V region during the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the "jackpot symbol 1" is selected based on the first special symbol lottery, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is usually "game state D".
On the other hand, as described above, when the "jackpot pattern 2" is selected, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the jackpot game state. Therefore, when the "jackpot pattern 2" is selected based on the first special pattern lottery, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is usually "game state B".

As shown in Figure 7 (b), if the "jackpot pattern 3" is won based on the second special pattern lottery and the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the jackpot game state, the game state after the jackpot game state ends will be "game state C."
On the other hand, if the "jackpot pattern 3" is selected based on the second special pattern lottery and the passage of the game ball through the V area is not detected during the jackpot game state, the game state after the jackpot game state ends will be "game state D."
Here, as described above, if the "jackpot pattern 3" is selected, it becomes easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the "jackpot pattern 3" is selected based on the second special pattern lottery, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is usually "game state C".
If "jackpot pattern 4" or "jackpot pattern 5" is won based on the second special pattern lottery, and if the passage of the game ball through the V area is detected during the jackpot game state, the game state after the jackpot game state ends will be "game state B."
On the other hand, if "jackpot pattern 4" or "jackpot pattern 5" is won based on the second special pattern lottery, and the passage of the game ball through the V area is not detected during the jackpot game state, the game state after the jackpot game state ends will be "game state D."
Here, as described above, if the "jackpot pattern 4" is selected, the game ball can easily (possibly) pass through the V area during the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the "jackpot pattern 4" is selected based on the second special pattern lottery, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is usually "game state B".
On the other hand, as described above, when the "jackpot symbol 5" is selected, it becomes difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the jackpot game state. Therefore, when the "jackpot symbol 5" is selected based on the second special symbol lottery, the game state after the jackpot game state ends is usually "game state D".

(Regarding simultaneous fluctuation of special symbols)
In pachinko machine 1, it is possible to simultaneously (at the same time) execute the notification display (changing display and stopping display) of the first special pattern on the special pattern 1 display device and the notification display (changing display and stopping display) of the second special pattern on the special pattern 2 display device in parallel.
In other words, in pachinko machine 1, when neither a jackpot game state nor a small jackpot game state is occurring, and when the "jackpot pattern" is not being displayed stopped (during the stopped time) for one of the game information (special patterns) of the special pattern 1 game information (first special pattern) and the special pattern 2 game information (second special pattern), it is possible to perform a start judgment (special pattern hit judgment, special pattern judgment, special pattern change pattern judgment, etc.) for the other game information.

In particular, when a start judgment is made based on one of the game information, Special Chart 1 game information and Special Chart 2 game information, if the other game information is displaying a changing ``jackpot pattern'' (during the changing time), the result of the start judgment based on that one game information cannot be determined to be a ``jackpot'' (jackpot pattern) or a ``small win'' (small win pattern), and is forcibly determined to be a ``miss'' (``miss pattern'').
For example, when a start judgment based on the first game information is executed, if a variable display based on the second game information in which a "jackpot pattern" has been determined by the start judgment is in progress (during the variable display time), the result of the start judgment based on the first game information is forcibly set to a "miss" (miss pattern).
On the other hand, when a start judgment is made based on one of the special chart 1 game information and the special chart 2 game information, if the other game information is displaying a changing ``small win pattern'' or ``miss pattern'' (during the changing time) then the result of the start judgment based on that one game information will not be forced.
Here, in this embodiment, when a start judgment is executed based on one of the game information, special chart 1 game information and special chart 2 game information, if the ``jackpot pattern'' is being displayed changing (during the changing time) for the other game information, the special chart hit judgment (special chart big hit judgment and special chart small hit judgment) is not executed in the start judgment based on that one game information.
However, when a start judgment is executed based on one of the game information, the special chart 1 game information and the special chart 2 game information, if the ``jackpot pattern'' is being displayed changing (during the changing time) for the other game information, the start judgment based on the one game information may be configured so that after the special chart hit judgment (special chart big hit judgment and special chart small hit judgment) is executed, the result of the special chart hit judgment is rewritten to ``miss.''

In addition, when the stopped display (stop time) of the "big win pattern" or "small win pattern" for one of the special chart 1 game information and the special chart 2 game information starts, if the other game information is in the process of changing display (during changing time), the other game information is forcibly changed to the "miss pattern", the changing display (changing time) ends, and the stopped display (stop time) starts.
For example, when the static display based on the first game information in which a "jackpot pattern" is determined by the start judgment starts, if a variable display based on the second game information is in progress, the variable display based on the second game information is forcibly ended and the static display based on the second game information is started. At this time, regardless of the result of the start judgment based on the second game information, a "losing pattern" is forcibly displayed.
On the other hand, if, for one of the special chart 1 game information and the special chart 2 game information, when the stopped display (stop time) of the ``losing pattern'' begins, the other game information is in the process of changing display (during changing time), the changing display (changing time) will continue for the other game information.

Here, for one of the special chart 1 game information and the special chart 2 game information, when the stopped display (stop time) of the ``big win pattern'' or ``small win pattern'' begins, if the other game information is in the process of changing display (during the changing time), the measurement of the changing time for the other game information may be interrupted.
In such a configuration, when the big win game state or the small win game state ends for one game information, the measurement of the suspended variable time for the other game information is started. At this time, while the big win game state or the small win game state occurs for one game information, the measurement of the variable time for the other game information is suspended, but the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) on the special pattern display device (special pattern 1 display device or special pattern 2 display device) and the variable display of the performance pattern in the performance pattern display area (performance pattern display area A or performance pattern display area B) are continued.
Alternatively, for one of the special chart 1 game information and the special chart 2 game information, when the stopped display (stop time) of the "big win pattern" starts, while the other game information is in the process of changing display (during the changing time), the other game information is forcibly changed to a "miss pattern", the changing display (changing time) ends, and the stopped display (stop time) starts; and, for one of the special chart 1 game information and the special chart 2 game information, when the stopped display (stop time) of the "small win pattern" starts, while the other game information is in the process of changing display (during the changing time), the measurement of the changing time for the other game information is interrupted.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, since it is possible to execute simultaneous variation of special symbols, the game state is changed at the start of the variation display of the special symbols.
That is, during the execution of the time-saving control, the value of the time-saving counter is updated at the start of each time of the variable display of the special symbol, and based on the updated value of the time-saving counter, it is determined whether or not to end the time-saving control. Then, when it is determined that the time-saving control is to be ended, the time-saving control is ended.
In addition, during the occurrence of the special pattern high probability state, the value of the probability variable counter is updated at the start of each special pattern variable display, and based on the updated value of the probability variable counter, it is determined whether or not to end the special pattern high probability state. Then, when it is determined that the special pattern high probability state is to be ended, the special pattern high probability state is ended.

(Regarding game progress)
Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the transition of the game state.
As shown in Figure 9, pachinko machine 1 has four game states (game zones), and while a game is in progress, one of the four game states ("game state A,""game state B,""game state C," and "game state D") occurs.
The degree of advantage of the four game states is, in order from the most advantageous to the least advantageous, "game state C,""game state B,""game state D," and "game state A" (high advantage → low advantage). Here, "advantage" refers to the degree of advantage given to the player.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1, when a "jackpot" is won by a special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery), a jackpot game state is created in which a game ball can enter the first big prize opening 54. Then, the player can win prize balls by getting the game ball to enter the first big prize opening 54.
Furthermore, when a "small win" is won by the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery), a small win game state is created in which the game ball can enter the second large winning hole 55. Then, the player can win prize balls by getting the game ball to enter the second large winning hole 55.
Here, in the pachinko machine 1, the number of prize balls paid out each time a game ball is detected entering the first large prize opening 54 is greater than the number of prize balls paid out each time a game ball is detected entering the second large prize opening 55. Also, the number of round games executed during the occurrence of a big win game state is the same as or greater than the number of small win games executed during the occurrence of a small win game state. This makes it possible to win more prize balls in the big win game state than in the small win game state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a special pattern high probability state and a special pattern low probability state are defined as game states regarding the probability of winning the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery or second special pattern lottery) (specifically, the probability of winning a "jackpot").
Furthermore, when the special pattern high probability state occurs, the probability of winning a "jackpot" through the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery or second special pattern lottery) is higher than when the special pattern low probability state occurs.
This makes it more likely that a jackpot game state will occur when a special chart high probability state occurs than when a special chart low probability state occurs, which is advantageous for the player.
In addition, the probability of winning a "small win" through the special pattern lottery (first special pattern lottery or second special pattern lottery) does not change whether a special pattern high probability state is occurring or a special pattern low probability state is occurring.

In addition, in pachinko machine 1, the game states related to the probability of winning the normal pattern lottery (specifically, the probability of winning a ``normal hit'') are specified as a normal pattern high probability state (a state in which the time-saving control is being executed) and a normal pattern low probability state (a state in which the time-saving control is stopped).
During the occurrence of the high probability state of normal symbols (time-saving control is being executed), the probability of winning the "normal hit" by the normal symbol lottery is higher than during the occurrence of the low probability state of normal symbols (time-saving control is stopped). Also, during the occurrence of the high probability state of normal symbols, the time for displaying the normal symbol variations is shortened compared to during the occurrence of the low probability state of normal symbols. Also, during the occurrence of the high probability state of normal symbols, the number of times the normal electric device 53a is opened in the normal hit game state is increased compared to during the occurrence of the low probability state of normal symbols. Furthermore, during the occurrence of the high probability state of normal symbols, the opening time of the normal electric device 53a in the normal hit game state is extended compared to during the occurrence of the low probability state of normal symbols.
As a result, it is easier for the game ball to enter the third starting hole 53 when a state of high probability of winning a normal symbol occurs than when a state of low probability of winning a normal symbol occurs, so that it is possible to obtain more opportunities to win special symbol lotteries while suppressing the reduction in the number of balls held, which is advantageous for the player.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a first special pattern lottery (first special pattern) and a second special pattern lottery (second special pattern) are defined as types of special pattern lottery (special pattern).
In the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a "small win" is higher than in the first special symbol lottery. Also, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of transition to a high probability is higher than in the first special symbol lottery.
As a result, the second special symbol lottery has a higher possibility of causing a small win game state than the first special symbol lottery, and also has a higher possibility of causing a special symbol high probability state when a "big win" is won, which is advantageous for the player.
The "high probability transition probability" is the probability that a "high probability jackpot pattern" will be selected when a "jackpot" is won through a special pattern lottery.
The "high probability jackpot pattern" is a type (winning type) of "jackpot pattern" that makes it easy (possible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the jackpot game state. In other words, the "high probability jackpot pattern" is essentially a type (winning type) of "jackpot pattern" that causes a special pattern high probability state after the jackpot game state ends.
The "low probability jackpot pattern" is a type (winning type) of "jackpot pattern" in which it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the V area during the jackpot game state. In other words, the "low probability jackpot pattern" is a type (winning type) of "jackpot pattern" in which a special low probability state occurs after the jackpot game state ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7(a), "jackpot pattern 1" and "jackpot pattern 2" are stipulated as winning types to be selected when a "jackpot" is won by the first special pattern lottery. Among "jackpot pattern 1" and "jackpot pattern 2", "jackpot pattern 1" is a "low probability jackpot pattern" and "jackpot pattern 2" is a "high probability jackpot pattern". In addition, the probability that "jackpot pattern 2" is selected is 50%. Therefore, the probability of transition to high probability in the first special pattern lottery is 50%.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(b), "jackpot pattern 3" to "jackpot pattern 5" are stipulated as the winning type to be selected when the "jackpot" is won by the second special pattern lottery. Among "jackpot pattern 3" to "jackpot pattern 5", "jackpot pattern 3" and "jackpot pattern 4" are "high probability jackpot patterns", and "jackpot pattern 5" is "low probability jackpot pattern". Therefore, the probability of transition to high probability in the second special pattern lottery is about 66%.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1, the probability of winning a "small win" in the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) is higher than the probability of winning a "big win." In particular, the probability of winning a "small win" in the second special symbol lottery is higher than the first special symbol lottery.
This allows the pachinko machine 1 to have more opportunities to draw the second special pattern, making it possible to generate small win game states consecutively in a short period of time, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the ball payout rate (payout rate) based on the small win game state.
The "ball payout rate" is the ratio (percentage) of the number of payouts (the number of winning balls paid out) to the number of balls out (the number of game balls shot out).

"Game state A" is the normal game zone.
In the pachinko machine 1, when the RAM clear initialization process (step S1-30) described later is executed, the "game state A" is generated.
Here, the first starting hole 51 is an entrance hole (fixed entrance hole) that opens upward, and game balls can always enter through it. As a result, during the occurrence of "game state A", it is possible to win a chance to win the first special symbol lottery by inserting a game ball into the first starting hole 51.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of "game state A", the probability of winning the "normal winning" by the normal symbol lottery is low (1/65536 in this embodiment). As a result, even if the game ball that entered the right path passes through the start gate 41, the possibility of the normal winning game state occurring is low, and it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the third start hole 53. Therefore, it becomes difficult to get an opportunity to draw the second special symbol based on the game ball entering the third start hole 53.
On the other hand, the second starting hole 52 is an entrance hole (fixed entrance hole) that opens upward, and game balls can enter at any time. This makes it possible to get a chance to win the second special symbol lottery by inserting a game ball into the second starting hole 52 while the "game state A" is occurring.
However, when the second special pattern lottery is executed while the "game state A" is occurring, the "long fluctuation time" (specifically, 590.0 [s]) is selected as the fluctuation time of the second special pattern regardless of the lottery result.
As a result, even if the player gets a chance to draw the second special symbol during the occurrence of "game state A", the time for which the special symbol is displayed variably becomes longer, making it difficult to get many chances to draw the second special symbol in a short time. As a result, it becomes difficult to continuously generate small win game states in a short time, and it becomes difficult to improve the payout rate based on the small win game states.
Therefore, while "game state A" is occurring, the game ball is shot down the left path with the aim of entering the first starting hole 51 in order to gain a chance to draw the first special pattern.
Here, during the occurrence of "game state A", if a "small win" is won by the first special symbol lottery, a small win game state is generated. However, even if the path for launching the game ball is changed from the left path to the right path at the time when the "small win symbol" is stopped and displayed, the game ball that entered the right path will not reach the second large prize opening 55 by the time the small win game state ends. This makes it difficult to win prize balls based on the small win game state, even if a "small win" is won by the first special symbol lottery.
In addition, during the occurrence of the "game state A", the probability of winning the "jackpot" by the first special symbol lottery is low (1/319 in this embodiment). This reduces the possibility of the jackpot game state occurring.
As a result, during the occurrence of "game state A", the possibility of a big win game state occurring is low, and it is difficult to win prize balls based on a small win game state. This allows the player to progress through the game with the aim of acquiring more opportunities to draw the first special symbol in order to transition to a more advantageous game state. In other words, the player will shoot the game ball along the left path with the aim of getting the game ball to enter the first starting hole 51.

As shown in Figure 9, when the "jackpot pattern 1" is won based on the first special pattern lottery executed while the "game state A" is occurring, the "game state D" is normally generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot pattern 2" is won based on the first special pattern lottery executed while the "game state A" is occurring, the "game state B" is normally generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
In this way, when "game state A" occurs, the game state transitions when a "jackpot" is hit. In this case, if "jackpot pattern 1" is hit, the game state transitions to "game state D", and if "jackpot pattern 2" is hit, the game state transitions to "game state B". In particular, it is more advantageous for the player to transition to "game state B" than to "game state D".

The "game state D" is a game zone for pulling back the "high probability jackpot pattern."
That is, during the occurrence of "game state D", the probability of winning the "normal symbol winning" by the normal symbol lottery is high (1/1 in this embodiment). As a result, every time a game ball that has entered the right path passes through the start gate 41, a normal symbol winning game state is generated and the third start gate 53 is opened. Therefore, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the third start gate 53, and it becomes possible to obtain more opportunities to draw the second special symbol lottery while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held.
Therefore, when "game state D" occurs, the game ball is shot toward the right-side path with the aim of entering the third starting hole 53 in order to gain a chance to win the second special pattern lottery while suppressing the reduction in the number of balls held.
In this embodiment, almost all game balls that enter the right path pass through the start gate 41. As a result, during the occurrence of "game state D", after passing through the start gate 41, almost all game balls that enter the right path enter the third start port 53 that is opened as a result of the passage of the start gate 41, and do not reach the second large prize port 55 located downstream of the third start port 53.
Therefore, while "game state D" is occurring, even if a "small win" is won by the second special pattern lottery, it becomes difficult to obtain prize balls based on the small win game state.
In addition, during the occurrence of the "game state D", the probability of winning the "jackpot" by the second special symbol lottery is low (1/319 in this embodiment). This reduces the possibility of the jackpot game state occurring.
As a result, while the "game state D" occurs, the player can get more chances to draw the second special symbol while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held, but the possibility of the big win game state occurring is low, and it is difficult to win prize balls based on the small win game state. As a result, in order to transition to a more advantageous game state, the player will progress in the game with the aim of winning the "big win" through the second special symbol lottery (with the aim of pulling back the "high probability big win symbol"). In other words, the game ball will be shot toward the right path with the aim of entering the third starting hole 53.

As shown in Figure 9, when the "jackpot pattern 3" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed while the "game state D" is occurring, the "game state C" is normally generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot pattern 4" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed while the "game state D" is occurring, the "game state B" is normally generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot symbol 5" is selected based on the second special symbol lottery executed while the "game state D" is occurring, the "game state D" is normally generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the number of time-saving times is consumed without winning a "jackpot" based on the second special symbol lottery executed while "game state D" is occurring, "game state A" is generated according to the consumption of the number of time-saving times. In other words, if the value of the time-saving counter is updated to "0" based on a start determination executed while "game state D" is occurring, "game state A" is generated according to the start of the variable display of the special symbol based on the start determination.
In this way, when "game state D" occurs, the game state changes when a "jackpot" (jackpot pattern 3 to jackpot pattern 5) is won or the number of time-saving turns is consumed. In this case, if "jackpot pattern 3" is won, the game state changes to "game state C". On the other hand, if "jackpot pattern 4" is won, the game state changes to "game state B". On the other hand, if "jackpot pattern 5" is won, the game state changes to "game state D". On the other hand, if the number of time-saving turns is consumed, the game state changes to "game state A".

"Game state B" is a game zone for adding prize balls (balls issued) based on the jackpot game state.
That is, during the occurrence of "game state B", the probability of winning the "normal symbol winning" through the normal symbol lottery is high (1/1 in this embodiment). As a result, every time a game ball that has entered the right path passes through the start gate 41, a normal symbol winning game state is generated and the third start gate 53 is opened. Therefore, it becomes easier for game balls to enter the third start gate 53, and it becomes possible to obtain more opportunities to draw the second special symbol lottery while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held.
Therefore, when "game state B" occurs, the game ball is shot toward the right path with the aim of entering the third starting hole 53 in order to gain a chance to win the second special pattern lottery while suppressing the reduction in the number of balls held.
As described above, in this embodiment, almost all game balls that enter the right path pass through the start gate 41. As a result, during the occurrence of "game state B", after passing through the start gate 41, almost all game balls that enter the right path enter the third start port 53 that is opened as a result of the passage of the start gate 41, and do not reach the second large prize port 55 located downstream of the third start port 53.
Therefore, while "game state B" is occurring, even if a "small win" is won by the second special pattern lottery, it becomes difficult to obtain prize balls based on the small win game state.
On the other hand, during the occurrence of the "game state B", the probability of winning the "jackpot" by the second special symbol lottery becomes high (1/136 in this embodiment). This increases the possibility of the jackpot game state occurring.
As a result, during the occurrence of "game state B", it is possible to obtain more opportunities to draw the second special symbol while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held, and the possibility of the occurrence of a jackpot game state increases. As a result, the game progresses with the aim of obtaining an opportunity to draw the second special symbol in order to obtain prize balls based on the jackpot game state. In other words, the game ball is shot toward the right path with the aim of entering the third starting hole 53.

As shown in Figure 9, when the "jackpot pattern 3" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed while the "game state B" is occurring, the "game state C" is normally generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot pattern 4" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed while the "game state B" is occurring, the "game state B" is normally generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot symbol 5" is selected based on the second special symbol lottery executed while the "game state B" is occurring, the "game state D" is normally generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
In this way, when "game state B" occurs, the game state changes when a "jackpot" (jackpot symbol 3 to jackpot symbol 5) is hit. In this case, if "jackpot symbol 3" is hit, the game state changes to "game state C". On the other hand, if "jackpot symbol 4" is hit, the game state changes to "game state B". On the other hand, if "jackpot symbol 5" is hit, the game state changes to "game state D".

"Game state C" is a game zone for adding prize balls (balls issued) based on the small win game state.
That is, during the occurrence of "game state C", the probability of winning the "normal winning" by the normal symbol lottery is low (1/65536 in this embodiment). As a result, even if the game ball that entered the right path passes through the start gate 41, the possibility of the normal winning game state occurring is low, and it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the third start gate 53.
As a result, when "game state C" occurs, the game ball that enters the right-side path passes through the start gate 41, then passes through the third start port 53, and reaches the second start port 52 and the second large prize port 55 located downstream of the third start port 53.
Therefore, during the occurrence of the "game state C", it becomes easy for a game ball to enter the second start hole 52, and it becomes possible to acquire an opportunity to win the second special symbol lottery based on the game ball entering the second start hole 52. Also, during the occurrence of the small win game state, it becomes easy for a game ball to enter the second large prize hole 55.
In addition, when the second special symbol lottery is executed during the occurrence of "game state C", the "long variation time" (specifically, 590.0 [s]) is not selected as the variation time of the second special symbol. Furthermore, in the second special symbol lottery, the probability of winning a "small win" is higher than in the first special symbol lottery. This makes it easier to continuously generate small win game states in a short period of time during the occurrence of "game state C", and as a result, it becomes easier to improve the ball output rate based on the small win game state.
In addition, during the occurrence of the "game state C", the probability of winning the "jackpot" by the second special symbol lottery becomes high (1/136 in this embodiment). This increases the possibility of the jackpot game state occurring.
As a result, during the occurrence of "game state C", it becomes easy to continuously generate small win game states in a short time, and as a result, it becomes easy to improve the ball payout rate based on the small win game state. This allows the game to proceed with the aim of acquiring more opportunities to draw the second special symbol in order to generate more small win game states.
Here, if a "big win" is won during the occurrence of "game state C," the "game state C" ends. Therefore, during the occurrence of "game state C," the player progresses through the game with the aim of winning more prize balls based on more small win game states by winning more "small wins" before winning a "big win."
In other words, the game ball is shot down the right-hand path with the aim of getting the game ball to enter the second starting hole 52.

As shown in Figure 9, when the "jackpot pattern 3" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed while the "game state C" is occurring, the "game state C" is normally generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot pattern 4" is won based on the second special pattern lottery executed while the "game state C" is occurring, the "game state B" is normally generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
On the other hand, if the "jackpot symbol 5" is won based on the second special symbol lottery executed while the "game state C" is occurring, the "game state D" is normally generated upon the end of the jackpot game state.
In this way, when "game state C" occurs, the game state changes when a "jackpot" (jackpot symbol 3 to jackpot symbol 5) is hit. In this case, if "jackpot symbol 3" is hit, the game state changes to "game state C". On the other hand, if "jackpot symbol 4" is hit, the game state changes to "game state B". On the other hand, if "jackpot symbol 5" is hit, the game state changes to "game state D".

As a result, in the pachinko machine 1, the more times "game state C" loops, the more prize balls are acquired based on the small win game state, which is advantageous to the player. Therefore, during the occurrence of each of the four game states ("game state A,""game state B," or "game state D") other than "game state C," the game progresses with the aim of elevating to "game state C."
In particular, in pachinko machine 1, a series of sections in which players can add prize balls (hereinafter referred to as the "prize ball addition section") can be made up of two play sections with different methods of adding prize balls, making it possible to improve playability.
Specifically, the "prize ball addition section" can be composed of a "big win addition section" in which prize balls are added based on the big win game state, and a "small win addition section" in which prize balls are added based on the small win game state.

(Regarding control commands)
Next, we will explain the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300, and the control commands transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the payout control board 400.
The main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the performance control board 300 is performed only in one direction from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300, and communication from the performance control board 300 to the main control board 200 is not performed.
Each control command transmitted from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300 is composed of one byte of high-order data indicating the type of control command and one byte of low-order data indicating the content of the control command.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command consisting of upper data and lower data to the performance control board 300 by serial communication. When the performance control board 300 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and the data of the control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM by this interrupt processing.

In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the main control board 200 to the performance control board 300 include a pattern type designation command, a variation mode designation command, a variation pattern designation command, a stop designation command, a game status designation command, a number of reserved designation command, an opening designation command, a round start designation command, a round end designation command, an ending designation command, a V winning designation command, a first look-ahead designation command, a second look-ahead designation command, a third look-ahead designation command, an error designation command, a demo designation command, a setting value designation command, a first big winning designation command, a second big winning designation command, an out designation command, and the like.
The symbol type designation command is a command to designate the type of the stopping symbol (one of the types of "miss symbol", "small win symbol 1", and "jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 5"). The symbol type designation command is transmitted when the variable display of the special symbol starts. Here, the symbol type designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information).
The fluctuation mode designation command is a command that designates the type of fluctuation mode (fluctuation mode number). The fluctuation mode designation command designates the fluctuation time associated with the fluctuation mode number by designating the fluctuation mode number. The fluctuation mode designation command designates the fluctuation time of the first half period (the aspect of the first half period of the fluctuation performance) of the fluctuation display (fluctuation performance) of the special pattern.
In this embodiment, m (plural) types of fluctuation modes are set, each corresponding to a different fluctuation time. The fluctuation mode designation command designates one ("fluctuation mode m") of the m types of fluctuation modes (fluctuation mode numbers).
The variation pattern designation command is a command that designates the type of variation pattern (variation pattern number). The variation pattern designation command designates the variation time associated with the variation pattern number by designating the variation pattern number. The variation pattern designation command designates the variation time of the latter half period (the aspect of the latter half period of the variation performance) of the variation display (variation performance) of the special pattern.
In this embodiment, n (plural) types of fluctuation patterns are set, each of which is associated with a different fluctuation time. The fluctuation pattern designation command designates one ("fluctuation pattern n") of the n types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern numbers).
The variation mode designation command and the variation pattern designation command are sent at the start of the variation display of the special pattern.

The stop designation command is a command that designates the stop display of the special symbols (performance symbols z1, z2). The stop designation command is transmitted at the start of the stop display of the special symbols. Here, the stop designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information).
The game state designation command is a command for designating a game state (game state offset value).
Here, the "game state offset value" is information that specifies the game state. In this embodiment, as the game state offset value, a numerical value corresponding to each combination of the value of the time-saving control flag, the value of the special chart high probability state flag, the value of the previous jackpot pattern flag, and the value of the post-jackpot spin counter is set.
The gaming state designation command designates one gaming state offset value. The gaming state designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when a special gaming phase (described later) is changed, and the like.
The reserved number designation command is a command to designate the reserved number. In this embodiment, the reserved number designation command designates that the reserved number (special drawing 1 reserved number or special drawing 2 reserved number) has increased by "1", that the reserved number has decreased by "1", or the reserved number.
Here, the "number of reserved special symbols 1" refers to the number of reserved notification displays (variable and stop displays) of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 display device. Also, the "number of reserved special symbols 2" refers to the number of reserved notification displays (variable and stop displays) of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 display device.
The reserved number designation command is transmitted when the power is turned on, when game information is stored, when the variable display of the special symbol starts, etc. Here, the reserved number designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information).

The opening designation command is a command that designates the start of the opening period (the start of a small win game state or a big win game state). The opening designation command designates the type of small win game state or big win game state to start (type of stopping pattern (specifically, one type among "small win pattern 1" and "big win pattern 1" to "big win pattern 5")). The opening designation command is transmitted at the start of the opening period (at the start of a small win game state or a big win game state).
The round start designation command is a command that designates the start of a round (small win game or round game). The round start designation command is transmitted at the start of a round (small win game or round game).
The round end designation command is a command that designates the end of a round (small win game or round game). The round end designation command is transmitted at the end of a round (small win game or round game).
The ending designation command is a command that designates the start of an ending period, and is transmitted at the start of the ending period.
The V winning designation command is a command that designates the detection of the passage of the gaming ball through the V area. The V winning designation command is transmitted when the passage of the gaming ball through the V area is detected.
The first look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the type of the stop symbol (one of the types of "miss symbol,""small win symbol 1," and "big win symbol 1" to "big win symbol 5"). Here, the first look-ahead designation command is defined to correspond to each of the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) and the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information).
The second read-ahead designation command is a command that designates the content of the variation mode. Specifically, the second read-ahead designation command designates that the type of the variation mode is indefinite ("indefinite value"), or designates one of m types of variation modes (variation mode number) ("variation mode m"). The second read-ahead designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.
The third look-ahead designation command is a command that designates the content of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the third look-ahead designation command designates that the type of the fluctuation pattern is indefinite ("indefinite value"), or designates one of n types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern number) ("fluctuation pattern n"). The third look-ahead designation command is transmitted when game information is stored.

The error designation command is a command that designates the occurrence of various errors. In this embodiment, the error designation command designates the occurrence of a vibration error, a magnetic error, a radio wave error, or a right-stroke error. The error designation command is transmitted when the occurrence of various errors is detected.
The demo designation command is a command that designates the start of a customer waiting state. The demo designation command is transmitted at the start of a customer waiting state.
The setting value designation command is a command that designates a setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230. The setting value designation command is sent when the RAM is cleared, when the power is restored after being powered on, when the setting change state ends, when the setting confirmation state ends, etc.

The first big prize designation command is a command that designates the entry of a game ball into the first big prize opening 54. The first big prize designation command is transmitted each time the entry of a game ball into the first big prize opening 54 is detected (each time a detection signal is input from the first count switch 103a). That is, the CPU 210 stores the first big prize designation command in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 by a process not shown each time a detection signal is input from the first count switch 103a. As a result, the first big prize designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 300 each time a detection signal is input from the first count switch 103a. Therefore, it becomes possible for the performance control board 300 to grasp the entry of a game ball (a winning ball) into the first big prize opening 54.
The second large prize designation command is a command that designates the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 55. The second large prize designation command is transmitted each time the entry of a game ball into the second large prize opening 55 is detected (each time a detection signal is input from the second count switch 103b). That is, the CPU 210 stores the second large prize designation command in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230 by a process not shown each time a detection signal is input from the second count switch 103b. As a result, the second large prize designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 300 each time a detection signal is input from the second count switch 103b. As a result, the performance control board 300 can grasp the entry of a game ball (a winning ball) into the second large prize opening 55.
The out designation command is a command that designates the discharge of a game ball from the play area 30 (passage of the game ball through the discharge path). The out designation command is transmitted each time a game ball is discharged from the play area 30 (each time a game ball passes through the discharge path, i.e., each time a detection signal is input from the out switch 109). That is, the CPU 210 stores the out designation command in the sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230 by a process not shown each time a detection signal is input from the out switch 109. As a result, the out designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 300 each time a detection signal is input from the out switch 109. This makes it possible for the performance control board 300 to grasp the discharge of a game ball from the play area 30 (out ball).

The main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 are connected to each other via a harness for serial communication. Here, communication between the main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 is performed bidirectionally. Each control command transmitted and received between the main control board 200 and the dispensing control board 400 is composed of 1 byte of data.
Then, the main control board 200 transmits a control command to the dispensing control board 400 by serial communication. When the dispensing control board 400 receives a control command from the main control board 200, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and this interrupt processing causes the data of the control command to be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM. Also, the dispensing control board 400 transmits a control command to the main control board 200 by serial communication. When the main control board 200 receives a control command from the dispensing control board 400, a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, and this interrupt processing causes the data of the control command to be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 230.

In the pachinko machine 1, a command to specify the number of winning balls, etc., is set as a control command to be sent from the main control board 200 to the payout control board 400.
The number of prize balls designation command is a command that designates the number of prize balls to be paid out. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls designation command designates the payout of n prize balls (n = 1 to 15). The number of prize balls designation command is transmitted when the payout control board 400 executes the payout operation of the prize balls.
In the pachinko machine 1, the control commands transmitted from the payout control board 400 to the main control board 200 are set to specify the occurrence and release of a payout error, the occurrence and release of a full tank error, the occurrence and release of a ball jam error, etc. Each control command is transmitted when the occurrence and release of various errors are detected.

(Processing Executed on Main Control Board 200)
Next, the processing executed by the main control board 200 will be described.
First, the functions of the hardware configured on the main control board 200 will be described.
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the random number generating circuit 203 starts the hardware random number update process.
In the hard random number update process, the values of the first loop counter to the third loop counter are updated by "1" within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 65535) each time one clock is input from the clock generation circuit 202 (in this embodiment, every 0.083 [μs]).
In addition, in the hard random number update process, the value of the fourth loop counter is updated by "1" within a predetermined range (in this embodiment, within the range of 0 to 10006) every time 32 clocks are input from the clock generation circuit 202 (in this embodiment, every 2.666 [μs]).
Then, the winning random number of the normal symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the first special symbol lottery, the jackpot random number of the second special symbol lottery, and the reach group random number are updated by the hard random number update process. Note that the hard random number update process is executed as a function of the random number generating circuit 203 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.
In addition, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the transmission shift registers of the command output ports 1 and 2 start a control command transmission process for transmitting the control commands stored in the FIFO buffer to the performance control board 300 or the payout control board 400. The control command transmission process is executed as a function of the command output ports 1 and 2 (hardware), and is executed independently of the process executed by the CPU 210 based on software, which will be described later.

Next, a game control process executed by the CPU 210 of the main control board 200 based on a program (software) stored in the ROM 220 will be described.
(CPU initialization process)
First, the CPU initialization process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the CPU initialization process.
When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the CPU 210 starts the CPU initialization process shown in Fig. 10. The CPU initialization process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the CPU initialization process is based on a program stored in the usage area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.

When the CPU initialization process is started, the process first proceeds to step S1-1.
In step S1-1, an initial setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-2. In the initial setting process, a startup program is read from the ROM 220, and settings required for executing various processes, such as register settings, are performed.
In addition, in the initial setting process, a RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 207, a detection signal from the setting key switch 208, and a detection signal from the inner frame opening sensor 108 are read.

Specifically, the value set in the reception memory area corresponding to the RAM clear switch 207 is read twice, and based on the results of the two reads, it is determined whether the on state of the RAM clear switch 207 has occurred. The determination result is then saved as the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, if it is determined that the on state has occurred, a value indicating that the on state has occurred (in this embodiment, "1") is saved as the switch information, and if it is determined that the on state has not occurred, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred (in this embodiment, "0") is saved as the switch information.

The value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the setting key switch 208 is read twice, and based on the results of the two reads, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 208 is in an ON state. The determination result is then saved as switch information for the setting key switch 208. At this time, if it is determined that the ON state is occurring, a value indicating that the ON state is occurring (in this embodiment, "1") is saved as the switch information, and if it is determined that the ON state is not occurring, a value indicating that the ON state is not occurring (in this embodiment, "0") is saved as the switch information.

The value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the inner frame open sensor 108 is read twice, and based on the results of the two reads, it is determined whether or not the inner frame open sensor 108 is in an ON state. If it is determined that the ON state is not occurring, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the ON state is not occurring (in this embodiment, "0"). On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state is occurring, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is not rewritten.

In step S1-2, a wait processing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-3. In the wait processing time setting process, a predetermined wait processing time (3.1 [s] in this embodiment) is set in a timer counter. This starts measuring the set wait processing time by the timer counter.
In step S1-3, it is determined whether the wait processing time set in step S1-2 has elapsed. If it is determined that the wait processing time has elapsed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-4. If it is determined that the wait processing time has not elapsed (No), the process of step S1-3 is repeated.
In step S1-4, a RAM access permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-5. In the RAM access permission process, the process required to permit access to the work area of the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access permission process, a value corresponding to the access permission is stored as a RAM protect value in a RAM access protection area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 becomes permitted.

In step S1-5, a gaming machine status flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-6. In the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, a gaming machine status flag is acquired.
Specifically, in the gaming machine status flag acquisition process, the value (gaming machine status flag) stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is saved (loaded) into the D register.
In step S1-6, it is determined whether the backup valid flag is normal or not. If it is determined that the backup valid flag is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-7. If it is determined that the backup valid flag is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, if the value (backup valid flag) stored in the backup valid flag area of RAM 230 is a specified valid value, the backup valid flag is determined to be normal, and if the value stored in the backup valid flag area is not the specified valid value, the backup valid flag is determined to be abnormal.

In step S1-7, a checksum calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-8. In the checksum calculation process, a checksum is calculated based on the backup information.
Specifically, in the checksum calculation process, first, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of the RAM 230 out of the backup information.
Next, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-used area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230 out of the backup information.
In step S1-8, it is determined whether the checksum calculated in step S1-7 is normal or not. If it is determined that the checksum is normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-9. If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-18.
Here, if both of the following conditions are met: "The checksum value of used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of used area M1 stored in the checksum area of RAM 230" and "The checksum value of unused area M2 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of unused area M2 stored in the checksum area," the checksum is determined to be normal.
On the other hand, if at least one of the following conditions is not met: "The checksum value of used area M1 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of used area M1 stored in the checksum area of RAM 230" and "The checksum value of unused area M2 calculated in step S1-7 matches the checksum value of unused area M2 stored in the checksum area," the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S1-9, a process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is turned on is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-10. In the process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is turned on, the area other than the setting value area and the game machine status flag area (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error-related area, the normal game-related area 1, the normal game-related area 2, and the stack area) is set as the range to be cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230.
In step S1-10, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 is in an on state. If it is determined that the on state is not occurring (No), the process proceeds to step S1-11. If it is determined that the on state is occurring (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-21.
Here, based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 saved in step S1-1, it is determined whether or not the on state has occurred for the RAM clear switch 207. At this time, if a value indicating that the on state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the on state has occurred, and if a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is saved, it is determined that the on state has not occurred.

In step S1-11, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-12, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S1-12, it is determined whether the setting confirmation condition is met, and if it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-13, and if it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not met (No), the process proceeds to step S1-14.
The "setting confirmation condition" is met when a playable state has occurred, and the on state of the RAM clear switch 207 has not occurred, and the on state of the setting key switch 208 has occurred, and the on state of the inner frame open sensor 108 has occurred.
Here, in step S1-1, if the on state has not occurred for the inner frame open sensor 108, the switch information of the setting key switch 208 is rewritten to a value indicating that the on state has not occurred. As a result, if the on state has occurred for both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has occurred is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. On the other hand, if the on state has not occurred for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that the on state has not occurred is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208.
Therefore, in step S1-12, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation condition is satisfied based on the switch information of the setting key switch 208 saved in step S1-1. At this time, if a value indicating that an ON state has occurred is saved as the switch information, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, and if a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is saved, it is determined that the setting confirmation condition is not satisfied.

In step S1-13, a setting check state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1- 14. In the setting check state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting value check state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-14, a process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-15. In the process for setting an area to be cleared when the power is restored, the setting value area, the game machine status flag area, the normal game related area 2, and other areas excluding the stack area (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error related area, and the normal game related area 1) are set as the range to be cleared (initialized) in the used area M1 of the RAM 230.

In step S1-15, an initialization process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-16, which will be described later.
In step S1-16, a subcommand transmission process upon power recovery is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-17. In the subcommand transmission process upon power recovery, a subcommand (power recovery designation command) for designating that the power has been restored from power interruption is stored in a subcommand output request buffer in the RAM 230.
In step S1-17, a dispensing command transmission process when the power is restored is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the dispensing command transmission process when the power is restored, a dispensing command specifying that the power has been restored from a power interruption is stored in a dispensing command output request buffer in the RAM 230.

In step S1-18, a backup abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-19. In the backup abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the backup abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-19, an unused area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-20. In the unused area read/write check process, the unused area M2 of the RAM 230 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is executed.
In step S1-20, an abnormality clearing target area setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-21. In the abnormality clearing target area setting process, all areas (specifically, the set value area, the gaming machine status flag area, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error-related area, the normal game-related area 1, the normal game-related area 2, and the stack area) are set as the range to be cleared (initialized) in the use area M1 of the RAM 230.

In step S1-21, a used area read/write check process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-22. In the used area read/write check process, the range of used area M1 of RAM 230 set in step S1-20 is cleared (initialized) and a read/write check is executed.
Specifically, in the used area read/write check process, all areas of the used area M1 of RAM 230 (specifically, the setting value area, the gaming machine status flag area, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error-related area, the normal play-related area 1, the normal play-related area 2, and the stack area) are cleared (initialized).
As a result, a predetermined initial value is set for each counter of the special pattern 1 display pattern counter, the special pattern 2 display pattern counter, and the normal pattern display pattern counter. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to a "missing pattern" is set as the predetermined initial value. That is, a value corresponding to a "missing pattern" corresponding to the first special pattern lottery is set as the value of the special pattern 1 display pattern counter, a value corresponding to a "missing pattern" corresponding to the second special pattern lottery is set as the value of the special pattern 2 display pattern counter, and a value corresponding to a "missing pattern" corresponding to the normal pattern lottery is set as the value of the normal pattern display pattern counter.

In step S1-22, it is determined whether the results of the read/write checks performed in steps S1-19 and S1-21 are normal or not. If it is determined that the results of the read/write checks are not normal (No), the process proceeds to step S1-23. If it is determined that the results of the read/write checks are normal (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-24.
In step S1-23, a RAM abnormal state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the RAM abnormal state setting process, a value corresponding to the RAM abnormal state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-24, it is determined whether a setting confirmation state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a setting confirmation state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-25, and if it is determined that a setting confirmation state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S1-26.
Here, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register. At this time, if the gaming machine state flag stored in the D register is a value corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has occurred, and if the value is not corresponding to the setting confirmation state, it is determined that the setting confirmation state has not occurred.
In step S1-25, a playable state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-26. In the playable state setting process, a value corresponding to a playable state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.

In step S1-26, it is determined whether the setting change condition is met, and if it is determined that the setting change condition is met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S1-27, and if it is determined that the setting change condition is not met (No), the process proceeds to step S1-28.
The "setting change condition" is met when the RAM clear switch 207 is in an on state, the setting key switch 208 is in an on state, and the inner frame open sensor 108 is in an on state.
Here, as described above, when an on state occurs for both the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that an on state occurs is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208. On the other hand, when an on state does not occur for at least one of the setting key switch 208 and the inner frame open sensor 108, a value indicating that an on state does not occur is stored as the switch information of the setting key switch 208.
Therefore, in step S1-26, it is determined whether or not the setting change conditions are met based on the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208 stored in step S1-1.
At this time, if values indicating that an ON state has occurred are stored for both the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, it is determined that the setting change condition is met. On the other hand, if a value indicating that an ON state has not occurred is stored for at least one of the switch information of the RAM clear switch 207 and the switch information of the setting key switch 208, it is determined that the setting change condition is not met.

In step S1-27, a setting change state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-28. In the setting change state setting process, a value corresponding to the setting change state is set as the gaming machine state flag in the D register.
In step S1-28, a gaming machine status flag saving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-29. In the gaming machine status flag saving process, the gaming machine status flag set in the D register is saved in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230.
In step S1-29, a RAM clear subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-30. In the RAM clear subcommand transmission process, a subcommand (RAM clear designation command) designating that the RAM has been cleared is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S1-30, a RAM clear initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-31. In the RAM clear initialization process, the RAM 230 is initialized. In the RAM clear initialization process, the range of the used area M1 of the RAM 230 that was set in step S1-9 is cleared (initialized).
Specifically, in the initialization process when the RAM is cleared, the areas in the used area M1 of the RAM 230 other than the setting value area and the gaming machine status flag area (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error-related area, the normal play-related area 1, the normal play-related area 2, and the stack area) are cleared (initialized).
As a result, a predetermined initial value is set for each counter of the special pattern 1 display pattern counter, the special pattern 2 display pattern counter, and the normal pattern display pattern counter. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to a "losing pattern" is set as the predetermined initial value. That is, a value corresponding to a "losing pattern" corresponding to the first special pattern lottery is set as the value of the special pattern 1 display pattern counter, a value corresponding to a "losing pattern" corresponding to the second special pattern lottery is set as the value of the special pattern 2 display pattern counter, and a value corresponding to a "losing pattern" corresponding to the normal pattern lottery is set as the value of the normal pattern display pattern counter.
In step S1-31, a payout command transmission process when the RAM is cleared is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-32. In the payout command transmission process when the RAM is cleared, a payout command specifying that the RAM has been cleared is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In step S1-32, a sub-command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-33. In the sub-command setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command that designates the current gaming machine state is stored in a sub-command output request buffer in the RAM 230.
Specifically, in the sub-command setting process, a power-on gaming machine state designation command that designates the gaming machine state flag (gaming machine state) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of RAM 230 is stored in a sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.
In step S1-33, a sub-command group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-34. In the sub-command group setting process, the sub-command group is stored in the sub-command output request buffer in the RAM 230.
Here, the group of subcommands includes a subcommand for specifying the phase when the power is restored, a subcommand for specifying the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand for specifying the launch position, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the first special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the second special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 1, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 2, a subcommand for specifying the value of the time-saving counter, a subcommand for specifying a setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230, and the like.

In step S1-34, an initial display time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1-35. In the initial display time setting process, the initial display time of the performance display device 206 is set in an initial display timer.
In step S1-35, an interrupt setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to the main loop process (step S2-1). In the interrupt setting process, the CTC (counter/timer circuit), which is a peripheral device, is initialized.
Specifically, in the interrupt setting process, an interrupt vector register is set, and an interrupt count value (4.0 [ms] in this embodiment) is set in the CTC.

(Initialization process when power is restored)
Next, the power recovery initialization process executed in step S1-15 will be described.
FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the initialization process when the power is restored.
When the power recovery initialization process is executed in step S1-15, the process first proceeds to step S28-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S28-1, an initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S28-3, in which the range of the used area M1 of RAM 230 that was set in step S1-14 is cleared (initialized).
Specifically, in the initialization process, the following areas of the used area M1 of RAM 230 are cleared (initialized): the setting value area, the game machine status flag area, the normal play-related area 2, and the stack area, except for other areas (specifically, the checksum area, the backup valid flag area, the error-related area, and the normal play-related area 1).
Here, in the initialization process, the normal game-related area 2 is not cleared (initialized). Therefore, the value of the special chart 1 display pattern counter, the value of the special chart 2 display pattern counter, and the value of the normal chart display pattern counter are not cleared (initialized).

In step S28-2, it is determined whether or not the pattern initialization conditions are met. If it is determined that the pattern initialization conditions are met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S28-3. If it is determined that the pattern initialization conditions are not met (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S1-16).
In this embodiment, the symbol initialization condition is stipulated as "a state in which a game is not being played (a state in which a game is stopped)".
Specifically, the pattern initialization condition is stipulated as "a state in which special games are not being executed (a state in which special games are stopped) and a state in which regular games are not being executed (a state in which regular games are stopped)."
Here, "a state in which a special game is not being executed" refers to a state in which all of the following conditions are met: (1) the first special pattern is not being displayed in a changing manner (during the changing time) or a stopped display (during the stopped time) on the special pattern 1 display device; (2) the second special pattern is not being displayed in a changing manner (during the changing time) or a stopped display (during the stopped time) on the special pattern 2 display device; (3) the number of reserved special patterns 1 = "0"; (4) the number of reserved special patterns 2 = "0"; and (5) neither a small win game state nor a big win game state is occurring.
A "state in which normal play is not being performed" refers to a state in which all of the following conditions are met: (1) the normal symbol display device is not displaying a changing normal symbol (during changing time) or a stopped normal symbol (during stopped time), (2) the number of reserved normal symbols is "0", and (3) a normal symbol winning play state is not occurring.

Specifically, in step S28-2, (1) in the special game phase flag area for special game 1 described later, a value corresponding to "awaiting special game 1 change" is set, (2) in the special game phase flag area for special game 2 described later, a value corresponding to "awaiting special game 2 change" is set, (3) in the special game phase flag area when a win is performed described later, a value corresponding to "special electric device not in operation" is set, (4) the value of the reserved number counter for special game 1 described later is "0", (5) the value of the reserved number counter for special game 2 described later is "0", (6) in the normal game phase flag area for normal game 1 described later, a value corresponding to "awaiting normal game change" is set, (7) in the game phase flag area when a normal game 1 is performed when a win is performed described later, a value corresponding to "normal electric device not in operation" is set, and (8) the value of the reserved number counter for normal game 1 described later is "0". If all of the following conditions are met, it is determined that the pattern initialization condition is met.
On the other hand, if at least one of the above conditions (1) to (8) is not satisfied, it is determined that the symbol initialization condition is not satisfied.

In step S28-3, the pattern initialization process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S1-16). In the pattern initialization process, the values of the special pattern 1 display pattern counter, the special pattern 2 display pattern counter, and the normal pattern display pattern counter are cleared (initialized).
Specifically, in the pattern initialization process, a predetermined initial value is set as the value of each counter for the special pattern 1 display pattern counter, the special pattern 2 display pattern counter, and the normal pattern display pattern counter. In this embodiment, a value corresponding to a "losing pattern" is set as the predetermined initial value. That is, a value corresponding to a "losing pattern" corresponding to the first special pattern lottery is set as the value of the special pattern 1 display pattern counter, a value corresponding to a "losing pattern" corresponding to the second special pattern lottery is set as the value of the special pattern 2 display pattern counter, and a value corresponding to a "losing pattern" corresponding to the normal pattern lottery is set as the value of the normal pattern display pattern counter.

(Main loop processing)
Next, the main loop process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the main loop process.
When the CPU initialization process (step S1-35) shown in Fig. 10 ends, the CPU 210 starts the main loop process shown in Fig. 12. The main loop process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the main loop process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the main loop process starts, the process first proceeds to step S2-1.
In step S2-1, an interrupt disable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-2. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set to disable interrupts from other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt disable state is set, execution of a power cut-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S2-2, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-3. In the initial value random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating initial value random numbers is updated.
Here, the "initial value random number" is a random number used to determine the initial value and end value of soft random numbers (winning pattern random numbers, reach mode random numbers, variable pattern random numbers, etc.), which are random numbers generated in a program.
That is, the value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number is updated within a preset range from the initial value to the end value. The initial value and the end value of the loop counter that generates the soft random number are changed every time the value of the loop counter reaches the end value. At this time, the initial value and the end value of the loop counter are determined based on the initial value random number.

In step S2-3, a main command analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-4. In the main command analysis process, the main command received from the dispensing control board 400 (the control command transmitted from the dispensing control board 400 to the main control board 200) is analyzed, and a process according to the analysis result is executed.
In step S2-4, a subcommand transmission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-5. In the subcommand transmission process, the subcommand stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230 is output to the transmission data register of output port 205 (command output port 1).
As a result, the sub-commands input to the transmission data register are stored in the FIFO buffer. The sub-commands stored in the FIFO buffer are then transmitted to the performance control board 300 in a predetermined order by the transmission shift register.
In step S2-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-6. In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released. As a result, the period from when the interrupt permission process in step S2-5 is executed until when the interrupt prohibition process in step S2-1 is executed becomes an interrupt permission period in which the execution of a power-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like is permitted.
In step S2-6, other random number update processing is executed, and the process proceeds to step S2-1. In the other random number update processing, software random numbers other than winning symbol random numbers (specifically, reach mode random numbers, variable pattern random numbers, etc.) are updated.

(Evacuation process when power is cut off)
Next, the power-off save process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the save process at the time of power interruption.
The main control board 200 is configured to include a power interruption detection circuit (not shown). The power interruption detection circuit monitors the power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 600, and outputs a power interruption warning signal to the input port 204 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined reference value.
When the CPU 210 receives the power cutoff warning signal, it starts the power cutoff save process shown in Fig. 13 during the interruption permitted period of the main loop process. The power cutoff save process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the power cutoff save process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the power interruption save process is started, the process first proceeds to step S3-1.
In step S3-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-2. In the register save process, the values of the registers used during the execution of the main loop process are saved in a save area of the RAM 230.
In step S3-2, a power cutoff notice signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-3. In the power cutoff notice signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value ("1" or "0") set in the reception storage area of the input port 204 corresponding to the power cutoff warning signal is read.
In step S3-3, based on the value read in step S3-2 (the value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the power cut-off warning signal), it is determined whether or not a power cut-off warning signal has been input from the power cut-off detection circuit.If it is determined that a power cut-off warning signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-4, and if it is determined that a power cut-off warning signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-13.

In step S3-4, an output port stop process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-5. In the output port stop process, the output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4) is stopped.
Specifically, in the output port stopping process, the values of all bits included in the port registers of the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4) are initialized, which stops the output of control signals and control commands by the output ports 205 (output ports 0 to 4).
In step S3-5, a backup valid flag setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-6. In the backup valid flag setting process, a predetermined valid value is saved in the backup valid flag area of the RAM 230.

In step S3-6, a checksum storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-7. In the checksum storage process, a checksum is calculated and stored.
Specifically, in the checksum saving process, a checksum is first calculated based on the information stored in used area M1 (F000H to F1FFH) of RAM 230. The calculated checksum value is then saved in the checksum area of RAM 230.
Next, a checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the non-used area M2 (F300H to F3FFH) of the RAM 230. The calculated checksum value is then saved in the checksum area.
In step S3-7, a RAM access prohibition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-8. In the RAM access prohibition process, a process for prohibiting access to the RAM 230 is executed.
Specifically, in the RAM access prohibition process, a value corresponding to the access prohibition is stored as a RAM protect value in a RAM access protection area of the RAM 230. As a result, access to the RAM 230 by the CPU 210 is prohibited.

In step S3-8, a loop counter setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-9. In the loop counter setting process, a predetermined number of times the power cutoff notice signal has been read is set as the value of the loop counter for recovery determination.
In step S3-9, a power cutoff notice signal reading process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-10. In the power cutoff notice signal reading process, the power cutoff notice signal is read from the power cutoff detection circuit.
Specifically, in the power cutoff warning signal reading process, the value ("1" or "0") set in the reception storage area of the input port 204 corresponding to the power cutoff warning signal is read.
In step S3-10, based on the value read in step S3-9 (the value set in the receiving memory area corresponding to the power cut-off warning signal), it is determined whether or not a power cut-off warning signal has been input from the power cut-off detection circuit.If it is determined that a power cut-off warning signal has not been input (No), the process proceeds to step S3-11, and if it is determined that a power cut-off warning signal has been input (Yes), the process proceeds to step S3-8.

In step S3-11, a loop counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S3-12, in which "1" is subtracted from the value set in the return determination loop counter.
In step S3-12, it is determined whether the value of the loop counter for recovery determination is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the loop counter for recovery determination is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the CPU initialization process (step S1-1). If it is determined that the value of the loop counter for recovery determination is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S3-9.
In step S3-13, a register restore process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process returns to the original process. In the register restore process, the register values saved in step S3-1 are restored. After the register restore process is completed, the process returns to the main loop process (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Timer interrupt processing)
Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 210 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process.
The clock generating circuit 202 generates an interrupt request signal at a predetermined interrupt period (4.0 ms in this embodiment).
In response to the occurrence of an interrupt request signal, the CPU 210 starts a timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 14 during an interrupt permitted period of the main loop process. The main loop process is based on a program for controlling the progress of the game. In other words, the main loop process is based on a program stored in the use area m1 (program area) of the ROM 220.
When the timer interrupt process is started, the process first proceeds to step S4-1.
In step S4-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the main loop process are saved in a save area of the RAM 230.
In step S4-2, an interrupt permission process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-3. In the interrupt permission process, an interrupt is permitted.

In step S4-3, a dynamic port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-4, which will be described later.
In step S4-4, a port input process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-5. In the port input process, the state of each switch and sensor is obtained.
The RAM 230 is provided with an ON state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3).
In the port input process, it is determined whether or not an ON state has occurred for each switch/sensor connected to the input port 204 (input port 0 to input port 3). Here, "ON state" refers to a state in which a detection signal has changed from a state in which no detection signal is being input (low level) to a state in which a detection signal is being input (high level). At this time, it is determined whether or not the ON state of the switch/sensor has occurred based on the information set in the reception storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor.
When it is determined that an ON state has occurred for each switch/sensor, a "1" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to that switch/sensor. On the other hand, when it is determined that an ON state has not occurred for each switch/sensor, a "0" is set in the ON state storage area corresponding to that switch/sensor.
In the following description, the value stored in the ON state storage area corresponding to each switch/sensor is referred to as the "switch bit data" of that switch/sensor.

In step S4-5, a gaming machine state flag acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-6. In the gaming machine state flag acquisition process, the gaming machine state flag stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired.
In step S4-6, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-7, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-9.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the gaming machine state flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine state flag has a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the acquired gaming machine state flag does not have a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S4-7, it is determined whether an abnormal condition has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that an abnormal condition has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S4-8, and if it is determined that an abnormal condition has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S4-19.
Here, it is determined whether or not an abnormal state has occurred based on the gaming machine status flag acquired in step S4-5. At this time, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred. If the acquired gaming machine status flag is not a value corresponding to any of the setting abnormal state, the RAM abnormal state, and the backup abnormal state, it is determined that an abnormal state has not occurred.

In step S4-8, a setting-related process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19, which will be described later.
In step S4-9, a timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-10. In the timer update process, various timers are updated.
Specifically, the timer update process updates the values of various timer counters (special game timer, normal game timer, security timer, etc.).
In step S4-10, an initial value random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-11. The initial value random number update process in step S4-10 is the same process as the initial value random number update process in step S2-2.
Specifically, in the initial value random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating an initial value random number is updated.
In step S4-11, a winning symbol random number update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-12. In the winning symbol random number update process, the value of a loop counter for generating a winning symbol random number among software random numbers is updated.
In step S4-12, a switch management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-13. In the switch management process, processes (such as obtaining various random numbers) are executed according to the state (whether or not the ON state is detected) of each of the switches 101, 102a, 102b, 104, and 110. The switch management process will be described later.

In step S4-13, a special game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-14. In the special game management process, the operation of the special display device (special display device 1 and special display device 2) and the operation of the special electric role objects 54a and 55a are managed. The special game management process will be described later.
In step S4-14, a normal game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-15. In the normal game management process, the operation of the normal map display device and the operation of the normal electric role object 53a are managed. The normal game management process will be described later.
In step S4-15, a state management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-16. In the state management process, various errors (abnormal states) are judged, and settings are made according to the judgment results.
In step S4-16, a winning port switch process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-17. In the winning port switch process, a process (such as updating various counters) is executed according to the state (whether or not the on state is detected) of each of the switches 101, 102a, 102b, 103a, 103b, 105, and 106.

In step S4-17, a payout control management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-18. In the payout control management process, a payout command is generated based on the value of the prize ball control counter set in step S4-16, and the generated payout command is transmitted.
In this embodiment, the prize ball control counters include a prize ball control counter 1 in which the number of ball game balls that have entered the first large prize opening 54 is stored, a prize ball control counter 2 in which the number of ball game balls that have entered the second large prize opening 55 is stored, a prize ball control counter 3 in which the number of ball game balls that have entered the left other prize openings 57a to 57c are stored, a prize ball control counter 4 in which the number of ball game balls that have entered the right other prize opening 56 is stored, a prize ball control counter 5 in which the number of ball game balls that have entered the first start opening 51 is stored, a prize ball control counter 6 in which the number of ball game balls that have entered the second start opening 52 is stored, and a prize ball control counter 7 in which the number of ball game balls that have entered the third start opening 53 is stored.

In the payout control management process, first, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 1 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (14 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is sent to the payout control board 400. After that, when the payout of the prize balls by the game ball payout device 440 is completed, the payout control board 400 sends a main command specifying the completion of the payout to the main control board 200. Then, in response to receiving the main command specifying the completion of the payout, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 1.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 2 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (10 [balls] in this embodiment) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, when the payout of the prize balls by the game ball payout device 440 is completed, the payout control board 400 transmits a main command specifying the completion of the payout to the main control board 200. Then, in response to receiving the main command specifying the completion of the payout, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 2.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 3 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 4 [balls]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 3 in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 4 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 4 in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 5 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 4 [balls]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 5 in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 6 is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 6 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 1 [ball]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 6 in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout.
Next, it is determined whether the value of the prize ball control counter 7 is "1" or more. If it is determined that the value of the prize ball control counter 7 is "1" or more, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 4 [balls]) is generated, and the generated payout command is stored in the payout command output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, a payout command specifying the payout of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 400. After that, "1" is subtracted from the value of the prize ball control counter 7 in response to receiving a main command specifying the completion of the payout.

In step S4-18, a launch position designation management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-19. In the launch position designation management process, a process related to the designation of the launch position is executed.
Specifically, in the launch position designation management process, when a state is changed from one that designates the launch of the game ball to the left path to one that designates the launch of the game ball to the right path (such as when a big win game state starts), the launch position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is set to "1," and a subcommand designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the subcommand designating the launch of the game ball to the right path is transmitted to the performance control board 300.
On the other hand, when the state changes from one specifying the launch of the game ball onto the right path to one specifying the launch of the game ball onto the left path (such as when the time-saving control ends), the launch position designation flag area of RAM 230 is set to "0".
In this embodiment, when "game state A" occurs, "0" is set in the launch position designation flag area, and information designating the left-hand path as the path along which the game ball should be shot is displayed on the right-hand hit display device.
On the other hand, when "game state B,""game state C," or "game state D" occurs, "1" is set in the launch position designation flag area, and information designating the right-side path as the path along which the game ball should be shot is displayed on the right-hand hit display device.

In step S4-19, an external information management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-20. In the external information management process, external information (external signals) to be output to the hall computer (or data display device) is set.
In this embodiment, external information output from the pachinko machine 1 to an external device (such as a hall computer, electronic device such as a data display device) includes information on the number of times a pattern has been determined, information on the starting port, information on a jackpot, security information, information on the number of payouts from the out port, information on the occurrence of an error, etc.
The "symbol determination count information" is external information related to the number of times the special symbol lottery (variable display and stop display of the special symbol) is executed. The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the symbol determination count information to the hall computer (or a data display device) every time the number of times the special symbol stop display is executed reaches a predetermined number.
The "starting hole information" is external information related to the entry of game balls into the starting holes 51 to 53. The CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the starting hole information to the hall computer (or a data display device) every time the on state of the detection signal input from the starting hole switch 101, 102a, 102b is detected.

The "jackpot information" is external information related to the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state. The main control board 200 outputs an external signal corresponding to the jackpot information to the hall computer (or a data display device) every time a jackpot gaming state occurs.
The "outlet payout information" is external information related to the number of game balls discharged from the discharge path (or the number of game balls discharged from the outlet 58). Each time the value of the external information out ball number counter reaches a predetermined value, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the outlet payout number information to the hall computer.
The "security information" is external information indicating that a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, or various errors (abnormalities) are occurring. When the value of the security timer is "1" or greater, the CPU 210 outputs an external signal corresponding to the security information to the hall computer.

In the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information confirmation count counter has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]). Then, if it is determined that the value of the external information confirmation count counter has reached the predetermined value, the pattern confirmation count information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Then, the predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the external information confirmation count counter. As a result, the pattern confirmation count information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the start port ball entry count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]). Then, if it is determined that the value of the start port ball entry count counter for external information has reached the predetermined value, the start port information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. Then, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the start port ball entry count counter for external information. As a result, the start port information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
In addition, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the external information jackpot count counter has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]). If it is determined that the value of the external information jackpot count counter has reached the predetermined value, the jackpot information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. Then, a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 1 [time]) is subtracted from the value of the external information jackpot count counter. This causes the jackpot information (external signal) to be output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the out ball count counter for external information has reached a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]). Then, if it is determined that the value of the out ball count counter for external information has reached the predetermined value, the out port payout information (external signal) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230. Then, the predetermined value (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]) is subtracted from the value of the out ball count counter for external information. As a result, the out port payout information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
In addition, in the external information management process, it is determined whether or not the value (gaming machine state flag) stored in the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 corresponds to a playable state.
Then, if it is determined that the value stored in the gaming machine status flag area is not a value corresponding to a playable state (determined to be a value corresponding to a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a setting abnormal state, a RAM abnormal state, or a backup abnormal state), the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.
Furthermore, in the external information management process, it is determined whether the value of the security timer is equal to or greater than "1". If it is determined that the value of the security timer is equal to or greater than "1", the security information is stored in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230. As a result, the security information (external signal) is output to the hall computer.

In step S4-20, an LED display setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-21. In the LED display setting process, display data to be output to the main display device 60 or the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 includes a common 0 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 1 output request buffer (8 bits), a common 2 output request buffer (8 bits), and a common 3 output request buffer (8 bits).
In the LED display setting process, first, the common 2 output request buffer is cleared (initialized), and the common 3 output request buffer is also cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the common 2 output request buffer is set to "0", and each bit value of the common 3 output request buffer is set to "0".
Next, the gaming machine status flag stored in the gaming machine status flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained.
Then, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a playable state, a normal state display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a setting change state, a setting change display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to a setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed. On the other hand, if the acquired gaming machine status flag is a value corresponding to an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state), an abnormal state display data setting process, which will be described later, is executed.

In the normal display data setting process, first, the value of the special chart 1 display pattern counter is obtained, and the display data (8 bits) corresponding to the obtained value of the special chart 1 display pattern counter is set in the common 0 output request buffer.
As a result, the first special symbol is displayed by LED1 to LED8, among the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60.
Next, the value of the special chart 2 display pattern counter is obtained, and display data (8 bits) corresponding to the obtained value of the special chart 2 display pattern counter is set in the common 1 output request buffer.
As a result, the second special symbol is displayed by LED9 to LED16, among the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60.
Next, the value of the regular display pattern counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value of the regular display pattern counter is set as output data a.
Next, it is determined whether the value set in the special game phase flag area of RAM 230 when a win occurs is a value specifying one of the following special game phases: "state before large prize opening is opened on jackpot", "state controlled to open large prize opening on jackpot", "state effective for closing large prize opening on jackpot", "waiting state for end of large prize opening opening on jackpot", "state before large prize opening is opened on small win", "state controlled to open large prize opening on small win", "state effective for closing large prize opening on small win" and "waiting state for end of large prize opening opening on small win".
Then, if it is determined that the value set in the special game phase flag area when winning is a value specifying one of the special game phases among "state before large prize opening is activated on jackpot", "state controlled by opening of large prize opening on jackpot", "state effective when closing large prize opening on jackpot", "waiting state until end of opening of large prize opening on jackpot", "state before opening of large prize opening on small hit", "state controlled by opening of large prize opening on small hit", "state effective when closing large prize opening on small hit" and "waiting state until end of opening of large prize opening on small hit", the value set in the special pattern determination flag area of RAM 230 (a value corresponding to the type of jackpot pattern) is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data b.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning is a value specifying the "special electric device non-operating state", the output data b is not set.
Next, the value set in the launch position designation flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as the output data c.
Next, the display data (8 bits) obtained by logically summing the output data a to output data c is set in the common 2 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60, LEDs 17 and 18 display normal symbols, LEDs 19 to 23 display the number of rounds of play to be executed during a big win game state or a small win game state (the type of big win game state or the type of small win game state), and LED 24 displays the path along which the game ball should be shot (the left path or the right path).
Next, the value of the special chart 1 reserved number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data d.
Next, the value of the special chart 2 reserved number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data e.
Next, the value of the normal pending number counter is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as output data f.
Next, it is determined whether the power supply has been restored.
Then, when it is determined that the power has been restored, the value set in the special chart high probability state flag area is acquired, and the display data corresponding to the acquired value is set as output data g.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the power has not been restored, the output data g is not set.
Next, the value set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is obtained, and the display data corresponding to the obtained value is set as the output data h.
Next, the display data (8 bits) obtained by logically ORing the output data d to output data h is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the main display device 60, LEDs 25 and 26 display the number of reserved special chart 1, LEDs 27 and 28 display the number of reserved special chart 2, LEDs 29 and 30 display the number of reserved regular charts, LED 31 displays the game status when the power is restored (when a high probability state for special charts is occurring or when a low probability state for special charts is occurring), and LED 32 displays the current game status (time-saving control is being executed or stopped).

In the display data setting process when the setting is changed, information indicating that a setting change state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and information indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "- " is set in the common 2 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "r", LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "n.", LEDs 49 to 56 display the letter "-", and LEDs 57 to 64 display a number indicating the set value.

In the display data setting process during setting confirmation, information indicating that the setting confirmation state is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and information indicating the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "r" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "n." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the display data corresponding to the setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230 is set in the common 3 output request buffer. Note that no display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (it remains at the clear value).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "r" is displayed by LED33 to LED40, the character "n." is displayed by LED41 to LED48, and numbers indicating the set value are displayed by LED57 to LED64. Note that LED49 to LED56 are turned off.

In the abnormality display data setting process, information indicating that an abnormal state (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is occurring is set in the common 0 output request buffer to the common 2 output request buffer, and an error code corresponding to the abnormality that has occurred is set in the common 3 output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) for "E" is set in the common 0 output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) for "r." is set in the common 1 output request buffer, and the display data (error code) corresponding to the abnormal state that has occurred (setting abnormal state, RAM abnormal state, or backup abnormal state) is set in the common 3 output request buffer. Note that no display data is set for the common 2 output request buffer (it remains at the clear value).
As a result, among the light-emitting elements constituting the performance display device 206, the character "E" is displayed by LED33 to LED40, the character "r." is displayed by LED41 to LED48, and a number indicating an error code is displayed by LED57 to LED64. Note that LED49 to LED56 are turned off.

In step S4-21, a solenoid data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-22. In the solenoid data setting process, the control data (drive data) to be output to each of the solenoids 64, 65a, 65b, 66 is stored (set) in the port output request buffer of the RAM 230.
In step S4-22, a port output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-23. In the port output process, various signals are output to the hall computer, the solenoids 64, 65a, 65b, 66, etc.
Specifically, in the port output process, various information (external signals, control signals, etc.) set in the port output request buffer are output to the output port 205 (output port 2, output port 3). As a result, the external signals set in the port output request buffer are output to the hall computer. Also, the solenoids 64, 65a, 65b, 66 are driven and controlled based on the drive signals set in the port output request buffer.
In step S4-23, an interrupt disable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-24. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set to disable interrupts from other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt disable state is set, execution of a power-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.

In step S4-24, a test signal output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-25. In the test signal output process, information for testing (test signal) is set.
The test signal output process is based on a program for executing a test-related process defined by the gaming machine regulations. That is, the test signal output process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The test signal tube is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
Specifically, in the test signal output process, test information (test signal) indicating the internal state (jackpot game state, execution status of time-saving control, probability state of special pattern lottery, etc.) is stored in the port output request buffer of RAM 230.
In step S4-25, a performance display device control process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S4-26, which will be described later.
In step S4-26, a register restore process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the program returns to the original process. In the register restore process, the register values saved in step S4-1 are restored. After the register restore process is completed, the program returns to the main loop process (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).

(Dynamic port output processing)
Next, the dynamic port output process in step S4-3 will be described.
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the dynamic port output process.
When the dynamic port output process is executed in step S4-3, the process first proceeds to step S29-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S29-1, an output data clear process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-2. In the output data clear process, the A register is cleared (initialized). Specifically, each bit value of the A register is set to "0".
In step S29-2, a main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-3. In the main display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 0. As a result, output port 0 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the main display device 60 goes low.
In step S29-3, a performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-4. In the performance display device data output process, the value of the A register (the value cleared in step S29-1) is output to output port 4. As a result, output port 4 is cleared (initialized), and each data signal ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") for controlling the lighting of the performance display device 206 goes low.

In step S29-4, a common selection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-5. In the common selection process, the value of the common counter is updated.
Specifically, in the common selection process, it is determined whether the value of the common counter has reached an upper limit value (in this embodiment, "3") or not. If it is determined that the value of the common counter has not reached the upper limit value, "1" is added to the value of the common counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the common counter has reached the upper limit value, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the common counter.
In step S29-5, a common output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-6. In the common output process, output data corresponding to the value of the common counter is output to output port 1.
Specifically, in the common output process, when the value of the common counter is "0", output data in which "COM0" is at high level and "COM1", "COM2", and "COM3" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM0" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "1", output data in which "COM1" is at high level and "COM0", "COM2", and "COM3" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM1" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "2", output data in which "COM2" is at high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM3" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM2" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".
On the other hand, when the value of the common counter is "3", output data in which "COM3" is at high level and "COM0", "COM1", and "COM2" are at low level is output to output port 1. As a result, "COM3" is selected (output) from among "COM0" to "COM3".

In step S29-6, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S29-7, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S29-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.

In step S29-7, a main display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-8. In the main display device data acquisition process, display data for the main display device 60 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the main display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer in the RAM 230 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the main display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer in the LED display setting process (specifically, the normal display data setting process) of step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt processing.

In step S29-8, a main display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-9. In the main display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-7 is output to output port 0.
As a result, data signals ("SEGDATA0" to "SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250a.
That is, the display on the main display device 60 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer).

In step S29-9, an interrupt disable process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-10. In the interrupt disable process, an interrupt disable state is set to disable interrupts from other processes. As a result, during the period in which the interrupt disable state is set, execution of a power cut-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later, is prohibited.
In step S29-10, a performance display device output process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4), which will be described later.

In step S29-11, a performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S29-12. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, first, the value of the common counter is confirmed. Then, the display data set in the output request buffer corresponding to the confirmed common counter value among the common 0 output request buffer to the common 3 output request buffer in the RAM 230 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the common 1 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the common 2 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the common 3 output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer in the LED display setting process of step S4-20 included in the previous timer interrupt process (specifically, the display data setting process when changing settings, the display data setting process when checking settings, or the display data setting process when an abnormality occurs).

In step S29-12, a performance display device data output process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S29-11 is output to output port 4.
As a result, data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (one of the common 0 output request buffer to common 3 output request buffer).

(Performance display device output processing)
Next, the performance display device output process in step S29-10 will be described.
FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the performance display device output process.
The performance display device output process is based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. In other words, the performance display device output process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device output process is called during execution of the dynamic port output process.
When the performance display device output process is called in step S29-10, the process first proceeds to step S30-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S30-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM. In addition, the values of all stack pointers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM.

In step S30-2, a performance display device data acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the performance display device data acquisition process, display data for the performance display device 206 is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
Specifically, in the performance display device data acquisition process, the value of the common counter is first confirmed. Then, the display data set in the area of the discrimination segment output request buffer and the ratio segment output request buffer of the RAM 230 corresponding to the confirmed common counter value is acquired, and the acquired display data is set in the A register.
At this time, if the value of the common counter is "0", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "1", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "2", the display data set in the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
On the other hand, if the value of the common counter is "3", the display data set in the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer is obtained, and the obtained display data is set in the A register.
Here, the display data acquired in the performance display device data acquisition process is the display data set in the identification segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer in the performance display device control process of step S4-25 included in the previous timer interrupt process.

In step S30-3, a performance display device data output process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-4. In the performance display device data output process, the display data set in the A register in step S30-2 is output to the output port 4.
As a result, data signals ("7SEGDATA0" to "7SEGDATA7") based on the display data set in the output request buffer (the discrimination segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer) are output to the source driver 250b.
That is, the display of the performance display device 206 is controlled based on the display data set in the output request buffer (the discrimination segment output request buffer or the ratio segment output request buffer).

In step S30-4, a register restoration process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-5. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S30-1 (the register values used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the stack pointer value saved in step S30-1 (the stack pointer value used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) are restored.
In step S30-5, an interrupt permission process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-4). In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released. This allows the execution of a power-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like.

(Settings related processing)
Next, the setting-related processing in step S4-8 will be described.
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the setting-related processing.
When the setting-related process is executed in step S4-8, the process first proceeds to step S37-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S37-1, it is determined whether a setting change state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a setting change state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-2, and if it is determined that a setting change state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S37-8.
Here, it is determined whether or not a setting change state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that the setting change state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the setting change state, it is determined that the setting change state has not occurred.

In step S37-2, a setting value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S30-3. In the setting value acquisition process, the setting values stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 are acquired (loaded), and the acquired setting values are stored in a register.
In step S37-3, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-4. If it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed (No), the process proceeds to step S37-5.
Here, with regard to the RAM clear switch 207, if an on state occurs, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has been pressed, and if an on state does not occur, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 207 has not been pressed.
In step S37-4, a setting value update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-5. In the setting value update process, "1" is added to the setting value stored in the register.

In step S37-5, it is determined whether the setting value stored in the register is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (in this embodiment, "6"), and if it is determined that the setting value stored in the register is not less than the predetermined setting comparison value (the setting value is greater than or equal to the predetermined setting comparison value) (No), the process proceeds to step S37-6, and if it is determined that the setting value stored in the register is less than the predetermined setting comparison value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S37-7.
In step S37-6, a setting value initialization process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-7. In the setting value initialization process, the setting values stored in the registers are overwritten with predetermined initial values (in this embodiment, "0").
In step S37-7, a set value save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-8. In the set value save process, the set values stored in the registers are saved in the set value area of RAM 230.

In step S37-8, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state. If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in the ON state (is in the OFF state) (No), the process proceeds to step S37-9. If it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in the ON state (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19).
Here, if the setting key switch 208 is in an ON state, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is in an ON state, and if the ON state is not occurring, it is determined that the setting key switch 208 is not in an ON state.
In step S37-9, a sub-command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-10. In the sub-command setting process, a setting-related end command (sub-command) is stored in the sub-command output request buffer in RAM 230.

In step S37-10, a sub-command group setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S37-11. In the sub-command group setting process, the sub-command group is stored in a sub-command output request buffer in RAM 230.
Here, the group of subcommands includes a subcommand for specifying the game state (game state offset value), a subcommand for specifying the launch position, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the first special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the stopping pattern of the second special pattern, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 1, a subcommand for specifying the number of reserved special patterns 2, a subcommand for specifying the value of the time-saving counter, a subcommand for specifying a setting value stored in the setting value area of RAM 230, and the like.
In step S37-11, a RAM set process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-19). In the RAM set process, the game machine state is set to a playable state.
Specifically, a value corresponding to a playable state is saved as the value of the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230 (gaming machine state flag).

(Switch management process)
Next, the switch management process in step S4-12 will be described.
FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the switch management process.
When the switch management process is executed in step S4-12, the process first proceeds to step S5-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S5-1, it is determined whether or not the on state of the gate switch 104 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the gate switch 104 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-2. If it is determined that the on state of the gate switch 104 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-3.
In step S5-2, a normal starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-3. The normal starting ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-3, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-4. If it is determined that the on state of the special diagram 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-5.
In step S5-4, a special chart 1 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-5. The special chart 1 starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-5, it is determined whether or not the on state of the first special chart 2 start port switch 102a has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the first special chart 2 start port switch 102a has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-6. If it is determined that the on state of the first special chart 2 start port switch 102a has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-7.
In step S5-6, a special chart 2 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-7. The special chart 2 starting ball detection process will be described later.
In step S5-7, it is determined whether or not the on state of the second special chart 2 start port switch 102b has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the second special chart 2 start port switch 102b has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-8. If it is determined that the on state of the second special chart 2 start port switch 102b has not been detected (No), the process proceeds to step S5-9.
In step S5-8, a special chart 2 starting ball detection process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S5-9. The special chart 2 starting ball detection process will be described later.

In step S5-9, it is determined whether or not the on state of the V area switch 110 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the V area switch 110 has been detected (Yes), the process proceeds to step S5-10. If it is determined that the on state of the V area switch 110 has not been detected (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In step S5-10, a V passage detection process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13).
In the V passage detection process, first, it is determined whether or not the V valid period is in progress.
Here, the "V valid period" is the period from the start of the first round of play executed during the occurrence of any of the jackpot game states "Jackpot 1" to "Jackpot 4" to the elapse of the valid time (interval time) for closing the large prize opening after the end of the first round of play.
If it is determined that the V valid period is in progress, the V winning flag area of the RAM 230 is set to "1" and the V winning designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V valid period is not in progress, the process is terminated.

(Normal starting ball detection process)
Next, the normal starting ball detection process in step S5-2 will be described.
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the normal starting ball detection process.
When the normal starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-2, the process first proceeds to step S6-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S6-1, a normal symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-2. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process, a winning random number (random number value) is acquired (loaded) from a loop counter corresponding to the normal symbol lottery.
In step S6-2, it is determined whether the value of the regular map pending number counter is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "1") or not. If it is determined that the value of the regular map pending number counter is not the upper limit value (No), the process proceeds to step S6-3. If it is determined that the value of the regular map pending number counter is the upper limit value (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-3).
In step S6-3, a regular map reservation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S6-4. In the regular map reservation counter update process, the value set in the regular map reservation counter is added with "1" and the new regular map reservation counter is set.

In step S6-4, a normal random number storage process is executed, and the process is terminated to move to the next process (step S5-3). In the normal random number storage process, the winning random number obtained in step S6-1 is stored in the normal game information storage area of the RAM 230 as normal game information.
The RAM 230 is configured to include a regular game information storage area in which regular game information is stored.
The regular game play information storage area is configured to include memory area 0 to memory area 4 as storage areas capable of storing regular game play information.
Memory area 0 stores regular game information during game execution. Meanwhile, memory areas 1 to 4 store regular game information for which regular win/loss judgment is pending. The priority of each memory area is specified to be memory area 1, memory area 2, memory area 3, and memory area 4 (highest to lowest priority) from highest priority. Then, regular game information stored in memory area 1 to memory area 4 is judged to be regular win/loss in the order of priority stored in the memory area with the highest priority.

(Special Figure 1 Starting ball detection process)
Next, the special chart 1 starting ball detection process in step S5-4 will be explained.
Figure 20 is a flowchart showing the starting ball detection process for special chart 1.
When the special chart 1 starting ball detection process is executed in step S5-4, it first proceeds to step S7-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S7-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the first special symbol lottery is set in a special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information start hole ball entry count counter.
In step S7-2, a reserved number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S7-3. In the reserved number counter address setting process, the address of the reserved number counter for special drawing 1 is set in the reserved number counter address setting area of RAM 230.
In step S7-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S5-5). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special chart 2 starting ball detection process)
Next, the special chart 2 starting ball detection process in steps S5-6 and S5-8 will be described.
Figure 21 is a flowchart showing the special chart 2 starting ball detection process.
When the special chart 2 starting ball detection process is executed in steps S5-6 and S5-8, it first proceeds to step S8-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S8-1, a special symbol identification value setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-2. In the special symbol identification value setting process, a special symbol identification value corresponding to the second special symbol lottery is set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230. In addition, "1" is added to the value of the external information start hole ball entry count counter.
In addition, in the special symbol identification value setting process, it is determined whether or not the right-hit period is in progress. If it is determined that the right-hit period is not in progress (the left-hit period is in progress), "1" is added to the value of the right-hit error counter.
In step S8-2, a reserved number counter address setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S8-3. In the reserved number counter address setting process, the address of the reserved number counter for special drawing 2 is set in the reserved number counter address area of RAM 230.
In step S8-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next processes (steps S5-7 and S5-9). The special symbol random number acquisition process will be described later.

(Special pattern random number acquisition process)
Next, the special symbol random number acquisition process in steps S7-3 and S8-3 will be described.
FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special pattern random number acquisition process.
When the special symbol random number acquisition process is executed in steps S7-3 and S8-3, the process first proceeds to step S9-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S9-1, a special symbol identification value acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-2. In the special symbol identification value acquisition process, the special symbol identification value set in the special symbol identification value setting area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S9-2, a special drawing reservation number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-3. In the special drawing reservation number acquisition process, the value (special drawing 1 reservation number or special drawing 2 reservation number) of the special drawing reservation number counter (special drawing 1 reservation number counter or special drawing 2 reservation number counter) specified by the address set in the reservation number counter address area is acquired (loaded).

In step S9-3, a special symbol random number acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-4. In the special symbol random number acquisition process, various random numbers (random value values) such as jackpot random numbers, winning symbol random numbers, reach group random numbers, reach mode random numbers, and variable pattern random numbers are acquired (loaded) from the loop counters corresponding to each lottery. At this time, the corresponding loop counter is selected based on the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1.
In step S9-4, it is determined whether the number of reserved special drawings (number of reserved special drawings 1 or number of reserved special drawings 2) obtained in step S9-2 is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, "4") or not. If it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings is not the upper limit value (No), the process proceeds to step S9-5. If it is determined that the number of reserved special drawings is the upper limit value (Yes), the process ends and the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5) is proceeded to.
In step S9-5, a special reserved number counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-6. In the special reserved number counter update process, the value set in the special reserved number counter (special reserved number counter 1 or special reserved number counter 2) specified by the address set in the reserved number counter address area is added with "1" and the value is set in the special reserved number counter.

In step S9-6, a special random number storage process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-7. In the special random number storage process, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in a special game information storage area (special game information storage area or special game information storage area) of the RAM 230 as special game information (special game information 1 or special game information 2).
The RAM 230 is configured to include a special chart 1 game information storage area in which special chart 1 game information is stored, and a special chart 2 game information storage area in which special chart 2 game information is stored.
The special chart 1 game information memory area is configured to include memory areas 0 to 4 as memory areas capable of storing special chart 1 game information.
The memory area 0 stores special game information for the currently playing game. Meanwhile, the memory areas 1 to 4 store special game information for which start determination is pending. The priority of each memory area is specified to be memory area 1, memory area 2, memory area 3, and memory area 4 (highest to lowest) in descending order of priority. Then, the start determination is executed for the special game information for the currently playing game stored in the memory areas 1 to 4 in the order of priority, starting from the one stored in the memory area with the highest priority.
The special chart 2 game information memory area is configured to include memory areas 0 to 4 as memory areas capable of storing special chart 2 game information.
The special game information of the 2nd special symbol during game execution is stored in the memory area 0. Meanwhile, the special game information of the 2nd special symbol for which start judgment is pending is stored in the memory areas 1 to 4. The priority of each memory area is specified to be memory area 1, memory area 2, memory area 3, memory area 4 (highest to lowest) in descending order of priority. Then, the start judgment is executed for the special game information of the 2nd special symbol stored in the memory areas 1 to 4 in the order of priority, starting from the one stored in the memory area with the highest priority.

In the special symbol random number storage process, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special symbol 1 game information storage area as special symbol 1 game information. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in an empty storage area (the storage area with the highest priority among the empty storage areas) among storage areas 1 to 4.
That is, if the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "1", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 1. On the other hand, if the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "2", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 2. If the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "3", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 3. If the current value of the special drawing 1 reserved number counter is "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 4.
On the other hand, if the special symbol identification value acquired in step S9-1 corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in the special symbol 2 game information storage area as the special symbol 2 game information. At this time, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored in an empty storage area among storage areas 1 to 4 (the storage area with the highest priority among the empty storage areas).
That is, if the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "1", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 1. On the other hand, if the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "2", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 2. If the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "3", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 3. If the current value of the special drawing 2 reserved number counter is "4", the various random numbers obtained in step S9-3 are stored in memory area 4.

In step S9-7, a reserved number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S9-8. In the reserved number designation command setting process, a reserved number designation command that designates that the special pattern reserved number (special pattern 1 reserved number or special pattern 2 reserved number) has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230. At this time, if the special pattern identification value acquired in step S9-1 is a value corresponding to the first special pattern lottery, a reserved number designation command that designates that the special pattern 1 reserved number has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230, and if it is a value corresponding to the second special pattern lottery, a reserved number designation command that designates that the special pattern 2 reserved number has increased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S9-8, a pre-determination process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-13 or S5-5). In the pre-determination process, various lottery results are pre-determined based on the game information (special game information 1 or special game information 2) (hereinafter referred to as "pre-determination target game information") saved (stored) in the special game information storage area (special game information 1 or special game information 2) in step S9-6.
In this embodiment, pre-determination of various lottery results is performed for all game information (special chart 1 game information and special chart 2 game information).
In addition, for game information acquired (stored) during the occurrence of a jackpot game state, a configuration may be adopted in which a pre-determination of various lottery results is not performed. Also, for special chart 2 game information acquired (stored) during the stoppage of time-saving control, a pre-determination of various lottery results is not performed, and for special chart 1 game information acquired (stored) during the execution of time-saving control, a configuration may be adopted in which a pre-determination of various lottery results is not performed.

In the preliminary judgment process, first, a preliminary special drawing hit judgment process is executed.
In the pre-special pattern hit determination process, the result of the special pattern lottery ("big hit", "small hit", or "miss") is determined (pre-special pattern hit determination).
The ROM 220 stores a special symbol big win lottery table in which big win values of the special symbol lottery are registered, and a special symbol small win lottery table in which small win values of the special symbol lottery are registered.
In addition, special chart jackpot lottery tables corresponding to each combination of the setting value ("1" to "6") and the game state ("special chart low probability state" or "special chart high probability state") are stored.
In addition, as special chart small win lottery tables, a special chart small win lottery table corresponding to special chart 1 game information (first special pattern lottery) and a special chart small win lottery table corresponding to special chart 2 game information (second special pattern lottery) are stored.
In the pre-special chart hit determination process, first, the pre-special chart big hit determination process is executed.
In the pre-special chart jackpot determination process, the value set in the set value area (set value) and the current game state ("special chart high probability state" or "special chart low probability state") are confirmed, and the special chart jackpot lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the pre-determination target game information and the read special chart jackpot lottery table, it is determined whether or not a "jackpot" has been won (pre-special chart jackpot determination).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "jackpot" has been won (the result of the special pattern lottery is determined to be a "jackpot"). On the other hand, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information does not match the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "jackpot" has not been won.
If the pre-special chart big win determination process determines that the player has not won a "big win," then the pre-special chart small win determination process is executed.
In the pre-special small win judgment process, the reserved type (special 1 game information or special 2 game information) of the pre-judgment target game information is confirmed, and the special small win lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, based on the big win random number included in the pre-judgment target game information and the read special small win lottery table, it is judged whether or not a "small win" has been won (pre-special small win judgment).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information matches the small jackpot value registered in the special small jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "small jackpot" has been won (the result of the special pattern lottery is determined to be a "small jackpot"). On the other hand, if the jackpot random number included in the pre-determined game information does not match the small jackpot value registered in the special small jackpot lottery table, it is determined that the "small jackpot" has not been won.
If the advance special pattern small win determination process determines that a "small win" has not been won, the result of the special pattern lottery is determined to be a "miss."

In the advance determination process, next, advance special symbol determination process is executed. In the advance special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined (advance special symbol determination).
If the pre-special pattern hit judgment determines a "jackpot" (win), the pre-special pattern judgment process determines the type of "jackpot pattern" (pre-special pattern judgment).
The ROM 220 stores a winning symbol selection table in which the correspondence between the winning symbol random number and the type of the "winning symbol" is registered. In addition, as the winning symbol selection table, a first winning symbol selection table corresponding to the special symbol 1 game information and a second winning symbol selection table corresponding to the special symbol 2 game information are stored.
In the first jackpot symbol selection table, "jackpot symbol 1" and "jackpot symbol 2" are registered as the types of "jackpot symbols." On the other hand, in the second jackpot symbol selection table, "jackpot symbol 3" to "jackpot symbol 5" are registered as the types of "jackpot symbols."
When the pre-determined game information is the special game information, the first jackpot symbol selection table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determined game information and the first jackpot symbol selection table that has been read out.
On the other hand, when the pre-determined game information is the special game information 2, the second jackpot symbol selection table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read second jackpot symbol selection table.
If the pre-special pattern hit judgment determines a "small hit" (winning), the pre-special pattern judgment process determines the type of "small hit pattern" (pre-special pattern judgment).
The ROM 220 stores a small win pattern selection table in which the correspondence between the winning pattern random number and the type of "small win pattern"("small win pattern 1") is registered. In addition, as the small win pattern selection table, a first small win pattern selection table corresponding to the special pattern 1 game information and a second small win pattern selection table corresponding to the special pattern 2 game information are stored.
When the pre-determined game information is the special game information, the first small win symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of the small win symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determined game information and the first small win symbol lottery table that has been read out.
On the other hand, when the pre-determined game information is the special game information 2, the second small win symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of the small win symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read second small win symbol lottery table.
If the preliminary special pattern hit judgment determines that the winning pattern is a "miss" (failed), the preliminary special pattern judgment process judges the type of the stopping pattern to be a "miss pattern" (preliminary special pattern judgment).

In the advance determination process, next, a first read-ahead designation command setting process is executed.
In the first pre-reading designation command setting process, a first pre-reading designation command that designates the type of the stopping pattern determined by the advance special pattern determination is stored in a sub-command output request buffer of the RAM 230.

In the preliminary judgment process, next, a preliminary special chart change mode judgment process is executed.
In the pre-special chart fluctuation mode determination process, a fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and a fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined.
In the pre-special chart fluctuation mode determination process, if a "jackpot" is determined by the pre-special chart hit determination, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined by the pre-winning fluctuation pattern determination process described below.
On the other hand, if the preliminary special winning judgment determines that the lottery has lost, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined by the preliminary fluctuation pattern judgment process in the event of a loss, which will be described later.
On the other hand, if the preliminary special winning judgment determines that the winning is a "small winning", the winning time preliminary fluctuation pattern judgment process and the losing time preliminary fluctuation pattern judgment process are used to determine the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern). At this time, based on the game state ("game state A" to "game state D") and the reserved type (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information), one of the winning time preliminary fluctuation pattern judgment process and the losing time preliminary fluctuation pattern judgment process is selected.
Specifically, when the result of the pre-special chart hit judgment is "small hit", and the current game state is "game state A", and the hold type of the game information to be pre-judged is special chart 1 game information, the pre-change pattern judgment process in the event of a loss is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the pre-special chart hit judgment is "small hit", and the current game state is "game state A", and the hold type of the game information to be pre-judged is special chart 2 game information, the pre-variation pattern judgment process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the pre-special chart hit judgment is "small hit", and the current game state is "game state B", and the hold type of the game information to be pre-judged is special chart 1 game information, the pre-variation pattern judgment process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the pre-special chart hit judgment is "small hit", and the current game state is "game state B", and the hold type of the game information to be pre-judged is special chart 2 game information, the pre-change pattern judgment process in the event of a loss is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the pre-special chart hit judgment is "small hit", and the current game state is "game state C", and the hold type of the game information to be pre-judged is special chart 1 game information, the pre-variation pattern judgment process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the pre-special chart hit judgment is "small hit", and the current game state is "game state C", and the hold type of the game information to be pre-judged is special chart 2 game information, the pre-variation pattern judgment process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the pre-special chart hit judgment is "small hit", and the current game state is "game state D", and the hold type of the game information to be pre-judged is special chart 1 game information, the pre-variation pattern judgment process at the time of winning is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the pre-special chart hit judgment is "small hit", and the current game state is "game state D", and the hold type of the game information to be pre-judged is special chart 2 game information, the pre-change pattern judgment process in the event of a loss is selected.

In the pre-winning fluctuation pattern determination process, first, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) is determined (pre-winning fluctuation mode determination).
The ROM 220 stores a winning time variation mode determination table in which the correspondence between reach mode random numbers and variation mode numbers (types of variation modes) is registered.
In addition, as a winning time fluctuation mode determination table, a winning time fluctuation mode determination table corresponding to each combination of the reserved type (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information), game state ("game state A" to "game state D"), type of stopped pattern ("jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 5" or "small win pattern 1"), and value of the special fluctuation counter is stored.
In each winning time fluctuation mode determination table, a fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and a winning time fluctuation pattern determination table (information specifying the winning time fluctuation pattern determination table) are associated with each reach mode random number. This allows the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the winning time fluctuation pattern determination table to be selected simultaneously based on each winning time fluctuation mode determination table.
In the pre-winning fluctuation mode determination, first, the pending type of the game information to be pre-determined (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information), the current game state ("game state A" to "game state D"), the type of the stopped pattern determined by the pre-determined special chart pattern determination, and the current value of the special fluctuation counter are confirmed, and the winning fluctuation mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read-out winning time fluctuation mode determination table, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the winning time fluctuation pattern determination table are determined.
In the process of determining the pre-winning fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is then determined (pre-winning fluctuation pattern determination).
The ROM 220 stores a winning time fluctuation pattern determination table in which the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern random number and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is registered.
In addition, as the winning time fluctuation pattern determination table, a plurality of winning time fluctuation pattern determination tables having mutually different contents are stored.
In the pre-winning fluctuation pattern determination, first, the winning fluctuation pattern determination table determined by the pre-winning fluctuation mode determination is read out.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the pre-determined game information and the winning variation pattern determination table that has been read out.
In this embodiment, the winning time fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the "jackpot pattern" specifies, as fluctuation pattern numbers (types of fluctuation patterns), a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to a "normal reach fluctuation" and a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to a "super reach fluctuation" (a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to a "no reach fluctuation" is not registered).
As a result, when a winning time fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to a "jackpot pattern" is selected, a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to a "normal reach fluctuation" or a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to a "super reach fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation pattern number.

In the pre-determining process for determining the fluctuation pattern when losing, first, the type of reach group random number contained in the pre-determined game information ('undefined value' or 'fixed value') is determined (pre-determining the random number type).
In this embodiment, the types of reach group random numbers are defined as "indefinite value" and "fixed value."
An "indeterminate value" is a type of reach group random number in which the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are not determined when game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) is acquired (stored), and the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined based on the number of reserved balls at that time (special chart 1 reserved number or special chart 2 reserved number) when a start judgment (step S11-12) based on the game information is executed.
The "fixed value" is a type of reach group random number for which the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined when game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) is acquired (stored).
In this embodiment, the value of the reach group random number is updated within the range of "0" to "10006." Among "0" to "10006,""0" to "8499" are set as "indefinite values," and "8500" to "10006" are set as "fixed values."
Therefore, in the pre-random number type determination, if the value of the reach group random number contained in the pre-determined game information is less than "8500", it is determined to be an "indefinite value", and if it is "8500" or greater, it is determined to be a "fixed value".

In the pre-fluctuating pattern determination process when losing, if the pre-random number type determination results in an "indeterminate value," the process proceeds to the next process without performing the pre-reach group determination, the pre-fluctuating mode determination when losing, and the pre-fluctuating pattern determination when losing, which are described below.
On the other hand, if the preliminary random number type determination determines that the value is a "fixed value," preliminary reach group determination, preliminary fluctuation mode determination in the event of losing, and preliminary fluctuation pattern determination in the event of losing are performed.

In the advance reach group determination, the reach group number (reach group type) is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a reach group determination table in which the correspondence between reach group random numbers and reach group numbers (reach group types) is registered.
In addition, as reach group determination tables, a reach group determination table corresponding to an "indefinite value" and a reach group determination table corresponding to a "fixed value" are stored.
In the reach group determination table corresponding to an "indefinite value", the reach group number corresponding to an "indefinite value" (hereinafter referred to as the "indefinite value reach group") is registered as the reach group number. On the other hand, in the reach group determination table corresponding to a "fixed value", the reach group number corresponding to a "fixed value" (hereinafter referred to as the "fixed value reach group") is registered as the reach group number.
In the advance reach group determination, a reach group determination table corresponding to the "fixed value" is read out. Then, a reach group number (a type of reach group) is determined based on the reach group random number included in the advance determination target game information and the read reach group determination table.

In the pre-fluctuating fluctuation mode determination when an election is lost, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) is determined (pre-fluctuating mode determination when an election is lost).
The ROM 220 stores a losing variation mode determination table in which the correspondence between reach mode random numbers and variation mode numbers (types of variation modes) is registered.
In addition, as a loss-time fluctuation mode determination table, a loss-time fluctuation mode determination table corresponding to each combination of reach group number, reserved type (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information), reserved number (special chart 1 reserved number or special chart 2 reserved number), game state ("game state A" to "game state D"), and special fluctuation counter value is stored.
In each losing time fluctuation mode determination table, a fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and a losing time fluctuation pattern determination table (information specifying the losing time fluctuation pattern determination table) are associated with each reach mode random number. This allows the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the losing time fluctuation pattern determination table to be selected simultaneously based on each losing time fluctuation mode determination table.
In the pre-fluctuating fluctuation mode determination when a player loses, first, the reach group number determined by the pre-reach group determination, the hold type of the game information to be pre-determined (special game information 1 or special game information 2), the hold number corresponding to the hold type of the game information to be pre-determined (special game 1 hold number or special game 2 hold number), the current game status ("game status A" to "game status D"), and the current value of the special fluctuation counter are confirmed, and a fluctuation mode determination table when a player loses the game corresponding to the confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read-out loss-time fluctuation mode determination table, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the loss-time fluctuation pattern determination table are determined.

In the pre-determination of the fluctuation pattern when losing an election, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined (pre-determination of the fluctuation pattern when losing an election).
The ROM 220 stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for when a winner is defeated, in which the correspondence between a fluctuation pattern random number and a fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is registered.
In addition, as the loss-time fluctuation pattern determination table, a plurality of loss-time fluctuation pattern determination tables having mutually different contents are stored.
In the pre-rejection fluctuation pattern determination, first, the rejection fluctuation pattern determination table determined by the pre-rejection fluctuation mode determination is read out.
Then, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the pre-determined game information and the read-out fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of losing.
Here, in the loss-time fluctuation pattern determination tail corresponding to the fixed value reach group, a fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to "normal reach fluctuation" and a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "super reach fluctuation" are specified (a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "no reach fluctuation" is not registered).
On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tail at the time of loss corresponding to the indefinite value reach group, a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "no reach fluctuation" is specified as the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) (a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "normal reach fluctuation" and a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "super reach fluctuation" are not specified).
As a result, when a "fixed value" is determined by the preliminary random number type determination, the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to a "normal reach fluctuation" or a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to a "super reach fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation pattern number.

In the advance judgment process, next, second and third read-ahead designation command setting processes are executed.
In the second and third look-ahead designation command setting processes, a second look-ahead designation command that designates the fluctuation mode number determined by the advance fluctuation mode determination, and a third look-ahead designation command that designates the fluctuation pattern number determined by the advance fluctuation pattern determination are stored in a sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.
Specifically, when the pre-winning time fluctuation pattern determination process is executed, a second look-ahead designation command that specifies the fluctuation mode number determined by the pre-winning time fluctuation mode determination, and a third look-ahead designation command that specifies the fluctuation pattern number determined by the pre-winning time fluctuation pattern determination are stored in a sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.
On the other hand, when the pre-fluctuating pattern determination process is executed and the pre-random number type determination determines it to be a "fixed value," a second look-ahead designation command specifying the fluctuation mode number determined by the pre-fluctuating mode determination at the time of loss, and a third look-ahead designation command specifying the fluctuation pattern number determined by the pre-fluctuating pattern determination at the time of loss are stored in the sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.
On the other hand, when a pre-fluctuating pattern determination process is executed in the event of a loss, if the pre-random number type determination determines that the result is an "undefined value," a second look-ahead designation command specifying an "undefined value" and a third look-ahead designation command specifying an "undefined value" are stored in the sub-command output request buffer of RAM 230.

(Special game management processing)
Next, the special game management process in step S4-13 will be described.
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the special game management process.
In this embodiment, the following phases (hereinafter referred to as the "special chart 1 special game phase") related to the game based on the special chart 1 display device (first special pattern) are defined: a "special chart 1 waiting for change state," a "special chart 1 changing state," and a "special chart 1 stopped pattern display state."
In addition, as game situations based on the special chart 2 display device (second special pattern) (hereinafter referred to as the "special chart 2 special game phase"), a "special chart 2 waiting for change state," a "special chart 2 changing state," and a "special chart 2 stopped pattern display state" are specified.
Furthermore, as phases (hereinafter referred to as "special game phases when winning") related to games based on the special electric devices 54a, 55a (jackpot game state or small jackpot game state), the following are specified: "state before large prize opening is opened when a jackpot is hit", "state controlled to open large prize opening when a jackpot is hit", "state effective for closing large prize opening when a jackpot is hit", "waiting state for end of large prize opening opening when a jackpot is hit", "state before large prize opening is opened when a small hit", "state controlled to open large prize opening when a small hit", "state effective for closing large prize opening when a small hit", "waiting state for end of large prize opening opening when a small hit", and "state where special electric device is not activated".

In addition, the RAM 230 is provided with a special game phase flag area for special chart 1, a special game phase flag area for special chart 2, and a special game phase flag area when a win is determined.
In the special game phase flag area of the special game phase 1, a value (special game phase flag of the special game phase 1) corresponding to one of the special game phases of the special game phase 1 among "a waiting state for the special game phase 1", "a state in which the special game phase 1 is changing" and "a state in which the special game phase 1 is stopped" is set (stored). This allows the special game phase of the special game phase 1 to be specified (determined) based on the value set in the special game phase flag area of the special game phase 1.
In the special game phase flag area of the special game phase 2, a value (special game phase flag of the special game phase 2) corresponding to one of the special game phases of the special game phase 2 among "a waiting state for the special game phase 2", "a state in which the special game phase 2 is changing" and "a state in which the special game phase 2 is displayed" is set (stored). This allows the special game phase of the special game phase 2 to be specified (determined) based on the value set in the special game phase flag area of the special game phase 2.
In the winning special game phase flag area, a value (winning special game phase flag) corresponding to one of the winning special game phases is set (stored) from among "state before opening the large prize entry port at the time of a big win", "state controlled to open the large prize entry port at the time of a big win", "state effective for closing the large prize entry port at the time of a big win", "state waiting for the end of opening the large prize entry port at the time of a big win", "state before opening the large prize entry port at the time of a small win", "state controlled to open the large prize entry port at the time of a small win", "state effective for closing the large prize entry port at the time of a small win", "state waiting for the end of opening the large prize entry port at the time of a small win" and "state in which the special electric device is not operating". This allows the winning special game phase to be specified (determined) based on the value set in the winning special game phase flag area.

Furthermore, the ROM 220 stores special game control modules (programs) for controlling (executing) special games, including a special game control module corresponding to each special game phase of special chart 1, a special game control module corresponding to each special game phase of special chart 2, and a special game control module corresponding to each special game phase at the time of winning (excluding the "special electric device not in operation state").
In the special game management process, a special game control module corresponding to the value set in the special game phase flag area (special game phase flag area for special chart 1, special game phase flag area for special chart 2, special game phase flag area when winning) of RAM 230 is selected, and processing based on the selected special game control module is executed.
Specifically, when the special game management process is executed in step S4-13, the process first proceeds to step S10-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S10-1, a special game management process for the special game number 2 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-2. The special game management process for the special game number 2 will be described later.
In step S10-2, a special game management process for special game number 1 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S10-3. The special game management process for special game number 1 will be described later.
In step S10-3, a special game management process when a prize is won is executed, and the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). The special game management process when a prize is won will be described later.

(Special Chart 2 Special Game Management Processing)
Next, the special game management process for special chart 2 executed in step S10-1 will be described.
Figure 24 is a flowchart showing the special game management processing for special chart 2.
When the special game management process for special chart 2 is executed in step S10-1, it first proceeds to step S40-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S40-1, it is determined whether or not the special electric device is not in operation. If it is determined that the special electric device is not in operation (Yes), the process proceeds to step S40-2. If it is determined that the special electric device is not in operation (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-2).
Here, if the value set in the special game phase flag area of RAM 230 at the time of winning is a value corresponding to the "special electric device not operating state", it is determined that the special electric device is not operating state, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the "special electric device not operating state", it is determined that the special electric device is not operating state.

In step S40-2, a target symbol setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-3. In the target symbol setting process, a value (in this embodiment, "1") corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information) is set in the target symbol discrimination flag area of the RAM 230.
As a result, the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information) is set as the type of special pattern to be processed (hereinafter referred to as the ``pattern to be processed''), and the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information) is set as the type of special pattern not to be processed (hereinafter referred to as the ``pattern not to be processed'').
In step S40-3, a special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-4. In the special game phase acquisition process, a value (special game phase 2) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S40-4, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S40-5. In the special game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (second special game phase) acquired in step S40-3 is read out.

In step S40-5, a special game control module execution process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-2). In the special game control module execution process, a process based on the special game control module read out in step S40-4 is started.
Specifically, in the special game control module execution processing, if the value acquired in step S40-3 corresponds to the "special chart 2 change waiting state", the special chart change waiting processing described below is started, if the value corresponds to the "special chart 2 changing state", the special chart changing processing described below is started, and if the value corresponds to the "special chart 2 stopped pattern display state", the special chart stopped processing described below is started.
At this time, the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information) is treated as the pattern to be processed, and the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information) is treated as the pattern not to be processed, and processing based on each special game module is executed.

(Special Figure 1 Special Game Management Processing)
Next, the special game management process for special chart 1 executed in step S10-2 will be described.
Figure 25 is a flowchart showing the special game management processing for special chart 1.
When the special game management process for special chart 1 is executed in step S10-2, it first proceeds to step S41-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S41-1, it is determined whether or not the special electric device is not in operation. If it is determined that the special electric device is not in operation (Yes), the process proceeds to step S41-2. If it is determined that the special electric device is not in operation (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-3).
Here, if the value set in the special game phase flag area of RAM 230 at the time of winning is a value corresponding to the "special electric device not operating state", it is determined that the special electric device is not operating state, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the "special electric device not operating state", it is determined that the special electric device is not operating state.

In step S41-2, a processing target symbol setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-3. In the processing target symbol setting process, a value (in this embodiment, "0") corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) is set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area of the RAM 230.
As a result, the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information) is set as the pattern to be processed, and the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information) is set as the pattern not to be processed.
In step S41-3, a special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-4. In the special game phase acquisition process, a value (special game phase 1) set in the special game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S41-4, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S41-5. In the special game control module acquisition process, a special game control module corresponding to the value (first special game phase) acquired in step S41-3 is read out.

In step S41-5, a special game control module execution process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S10-3). In the special game control module execution process, a process based on the special game control module read out in step S41-3 is started.
Specifically, in the special game control module execution processing, if the value acquired in step S41-3 is a value corresponding to the "special chart 1 change waiting state", the special chart change waiting processing described below is started, if the value is a value corresponding to the "special chart 1 changing state", the special chart changing processing described below is started, and if the value is a value corresponding to the "special chart 1 stopped pattern display state", the special chart stopped processing described below is started.
At this time, the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information) is treated as the pattern to be processed, and the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information) is treated as the pattern not to be processed, and processing based on each special game module is executed.

(Special game management process when winning)
Next, the winning special game management process executed in step S10-3 will be described.
FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special game management process when a prize is won.
When the winning special game management process is executed in step S10-3, as shown in FIG. 26, the process first proceeds to step S42-1.
In step S42-1, a special game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-2. In the special game phase acquisition process, a value (a special game phase at the time of winning) set in a special game phase flag area at the time of winning in the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S42-2, it is determined whether the value obtained in step S42-1 (special game phase at the time of winning) is a value corresponding to the "special electric device not operating state", and if it is determined that the value does not correspond to the "special electric device not operating state" (No), the process proceeds to step S42-3, and if it is determined that the value corresponds to the "special electric device not operating state" (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S42-3, a special game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S42-4. In the special game control module acquisition process, a special game control module corresponding to the value (the special game phase at the time of winning) acquired in step S42-1 is read out.

In step S42-4, a special game control module execution process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14). In the special game control module execution process, a process based on the special game control module read out in step S42-3 is started.
Specifically, in the special game control module execution process, if the value acquired in step S42-3 is a value corresponding to the "state before the large prize opening at the time of a jackpot", the process before the large prize opening described later is started, if the value corresponds to the "state of controlling the opening of the large prize opening at the time of a jackpot", the process before the large prize opening described later is started, if the value corresponds to the "state of enabling the closing of the large prize opening at the time of a jackpot", the process enabling the closing of the large prize opening described later is started, if the value corresponds to the "state of waiting for the end of the opening of the large prize opening at the time of a jackpot", the process of ending the opening of the large prize opening described later is started, Wait processing begins, and if the value corresponds to the ``state before opening the large prize opening on a small hit'', the pre-opening processing before opening the large prize opening on a small hit described below is started, and if the value corresponds to the ``large prize opening opening control state on a small hit'', the pre-opening processing before opening the large prize opening on a small hit described below is started, and if the value corresponds to the ``large prize opening closing effective state on a small hit'', the large prize opening closing effective processing on a small hit described below is started, and if the value corresponds to the ``waiting state before large prize opening is opened on a small hit'', the wait processing for ending the opening of the large prize opening on a small hit described below is started.

(Waiting for special chart changes)
Next, the special chart change waiting process executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5 will be described.
FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special chart change waiting process.
When the special chart change waiting process is executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5, as shown in FIG. 27, the process first proceeds to step S11-1.
In step S11-1, it is determined whether the value of the reserved number counter corresponding to the pattern to be processed (special pattern 1 reserved number counter or special pattern 2 reserved number counter) is "1" or greater, and if it is determined that the value of the reserved number counter corresponding to the pattern to be processed is "1" or greater (Yes), the process proceeds to step S11-2, and if it is determined that the value of the reserved number counter corresponding to the pattern to be processed is not "1" or greater (is "0") (No), the process proceeds to step S11-18.
Here, when the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the special pattern 2 reserved number counter becomes the reserved number counter corresponding to the processing target pattern.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", the special pattern 1 reserved number counter becomes the reserved number counter corresponding to the processing target pattern.

In step S11-2, it is determined whether the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the non-target pattern specifies a "jackpot pattern"("jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 6"), and if it is determined that the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the non-target pattern specifies a "jackpot pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S11-3, and if it is determined that the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the non-target pattern does not specify a "jackpot pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S11-4.
Here, the RAM 230 is provided with a special pattern 1 information storage area and a special pattern 2 information storage area.
The "special pattern 1 pattern information memory area" sets (stores) pattern information corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information).
The "special pattern 2 pattern information storage area" sets (stores) pattern information corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information).
The "symbol information" is information that specifies the type of the stopping symbol determined by the special symbol determination (step S11-7).
Then, in step S11-2, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", it is determined whether or not the pattern information stored in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area specifies a "jackpot pattern".
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", it is determined whether or not the pattern information stored in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area specifies a "jackpot pattern".

In step S11-3, it is determined whether or not a non-target symbol is currently being displayed in a stopped state (during the stopped time), and if it is determined that the non-target symbol is not currently being displayed in a stopped state (No), the process proceeds to step S11-4, and if it is determined that the non-target symbol is currently being displayed in a stopped state (Yes), the process is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2, S10-3).
Here, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", it is determined whether or not the non-processing target symbol is being stopped based on the value set in the special game phase flag area of ...
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", it is determined whether or not the non-processing target symbol is being stopped based on the value set in the special symbol 2 special game phase flag area. At this time, if the value set in the special symbol 2 special game phase flag area is a value corresponding to the "special symbol 2 stopped symbol display state", it is determined that the non-processing target symbol is being stopped, and if it is not a value corresponding to the "special symbol 2 stopped symbol display state", it is determined that the non-processing target symbol is not being stopped.

In step S11-4, a special drawing reservation number update process is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S11-5.
In the special pattern reserved number update process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the reserved number counter (special pattern 1 reserved number counter or special pattern 2 reserved number counter) corresponding to the pattern to be processed.
Here, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", "1" is subtracted from the value of the special pattern 2 reserved number counter.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", "1" is subtracted from the value of the special pattern 1 reserved number counter.
In the special chart reservation number update process, next, "1" is added to the value of the special variable counter.
In the special reserved number update process, next, "1" is added to the value of the post-jackpot spin count counter.
In step S11-5, a reserved number designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-6. In the reserved number designation command setting process, a reserved number designation command that designates that the reserved number corresponding to the target symbol (special symbol 1 reserved number or special symbol 2 reserved number) has been decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.
Here, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", a reserved number designation command specifying that the reserved number of special pattern 2 has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", a reserved number designation command specifying that the reserved number of special pattern 1 has decreased by "1" is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of RAM 230.

In step S11-6, a special symbol storage area shift process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-7. In the special symbol storage area shift process, the storage area in which the game information (special symbol 1 game information or special symbol 2 game information) is stored is shifted in the game information storage area (special symbol 1 game information storage area or special symbol 2 game information storage area) corresponding to the target symbol.
Here, if the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the memory area in which the special symbol 2 game information is stored is shifted in the special symbol 2 game information memory area. That is, first, the memory contents of memory area 1 are shifted (moved) to memory area 0. Next, the memory contents of memory area 2 are shifted to memory area 1. Next, the memory contents of memory area 3 are shifted to memory area 2. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 are shifted to memory area 3. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 are cleared (initialized).
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the memory area in which the special symbol 1 game information is stored is shifted in the special symbol 1 game information memory area. That is, first, the memory contents of memory area 1 are shifted (moved) to memory area 0. Next, the memory contents of memory area 2 are shifted to memory area 1. Next, the memory contents of memory area 3 are shifted to memory area 2. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 are shifted to memory area 3. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 are cleared (initialized).

In step S11-7, a setting abnormality determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-8. In the setting abnormality determination process, occurrence of a setting abnormality is monitored.
Specifically, in the setting abnormality determination process, first, the setting value stored in the setting value area of the RAM 230 is obtained. Next, it is determined whether the obtained setting value is less than a predetermined setting comparison value (in this embodiment, "6") or not.
Then, when it is determined that the acquired setting value is not less than the predetermined setting comparison value (is equal to or greater than the predetermined setting comparison value), a value corresponding to the setting abnormal state is saved as the value (gaming machine state flag) of the gaming machine state flag area of the RAM 230. Also, a subcommand designating the occurrence of the setting abnormality is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the acquired setting value is less than the predetermined setting comparison value, the process proceeds to the next process (step S11-8).

In step S11-8, a special symbol winning judgment process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-9. In the special symbol winning judgment process, the result of the special symbol lottery is judged (special symbol winning judgment) based on the game information (hereinafter referred to as "start judgment target game information") stored in the memory area 0 of the game information memory area (special symbol 1 game information memory area or special symbol 2 game information memory area) corresponding to the target pattern.
Here, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the special chart 2 game information stored in memory area 0 of the special chart 2 game information memory area becomes the game information subject to start judgment.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", the special pattern 1 game information stored in memory area 0 of the special pattern 1 game information memory area becomes the game information to be judged as the start.

Specifically, in the special pattern hit determination process, first, the pattern information set in the pattern information storage area (special pattern 1 pattern information storage area or special pattern 2 pattern information storage area) corresponding to the pattern not to be processed is obtained.
At this time, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the pattern information set in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area is acquired. On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", the pattern information set in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area is acquired.
Next, it is determined whether or not the acquired symbol information corresponding to the non-processing target symbol specifies a "jackpot symbol"("jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 5").
Then, if it is determined that the pattern information corresponding to the acquired non-target pattern specifies a "jackpot pattern," the result of the special pattern lottery is determined to be a "miss" for the target pattern without executing the special jackpot determination process and the special small jackpot determination process, and the process proceeds to the next step (step S11-9).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pattern information corresponding to the acquired non-target pattern does not specify a "jackpot pattern" (specifies a "small win pattern 1" or a "miss pattern"), a special jackpot determination process is first executed for the target pattern.
In the special chart jackpot determination process, the value set in the setting value area (set value) and the current game state ("special chart high probability state" or "special chart low probability state") are confirmed, and the special chart jackpot lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, based on the jackpot random number included in the start judgment target game information and the read special chart jackpot lottery table, it is determined whether or not a "jackpot" has been won (special chart jackpot determination).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to start judgment matches the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "jackpot" has been won (the result of the special pattern lottery is determined to be a "jackpot"). On the other hand, if the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to start judgment does not match the jackpot value registered in the special jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "jackpot" has not been won.
If the special chart big win determination process determines that the symbol has not won a "big win," then the special chart small win determination process is executed for the symbol being processed.
In the special chart small win judgment process, the reserved type (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) of the start judgment target game information is confirmed, and the special chart small win lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, based on the big win random number included in the start judgment target game information and the read special chart small win lottery table, it is judged whether or not a "small win" has been won (special chart small win judgment).
At this time, if the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to start judgment matches the small jackpot value registered in the special small jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "small jackpot" has been won (the result of the special pattern lottery is determined to be a "small jackpot"). On the other hand, if the jackpot random number included in the game information subject to start judgment does not match the small jackpot value registered in the special small jackpot lottery table, it is determined that a "small jackpot" has not been won.
If the special pattern small win determination process determines that a "small win" has not been won, the result of the special pattern lottery for the pattern being processed is determined to be a "miss."

In step S11-9, a special symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-10. In the special symbol determination process, the type of the stop symbol of the processing target symbol is determined (special symbol determination).
Specifically, in the special pattern determination process, first, the result of the special pattern hit determination is confirmed.
Then, if the special pattern hit judgment determines that there has been a "jackpot" (a win), the type of "jackpot pattern" is determined.
For this purpose, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the second jackpot symbol selection table is read out. Then, the type of the jackpot symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the start determination target game information and the read second jackpot symbol selection table.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the first big win symbol selection table is read out. Then, the type of the big win symbol is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the start determination target game information and the read first big win symbol selection table.
On the other hand, if the special pattern hit judgment determines that it is a "small hit" (winning), the type of "small hit pattern" is determined.
For this purpose, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the second small win symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of small win symbol ("small win symbol 1" to "small win symbol 3") is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the start judgment target game information and the read second small win symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the first small win symbol lottery table is read out. Then, the type of small win symbol ("small win symbol 1" to "small win symbol 3") is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the start judgment target game information and the read first small win symbol lottery table.
On the other hand, if the special winning judgment results in a "miss" (failure), the type of the stopping pattern is judged to be a "missing pattern."
In the special pattern determination process, next, pattern information specifying the type of the determined stopping pattern is set in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed (special pattern 1 pattern information storage area or special pattern 2 pattern information storage area).
At this time, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", pattern information specifying the type of the determined stopping pattern is set in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", pattern information specifying the type of the determined stopping pattern is set in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area.
In step S11-10, a symbol type designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-11. In the symbol type designation command setting process, the symbol type designation command that designates the type of the stopped symbol determined in step S11-9 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S11-11, a special symbol stop pattern number determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-12. In the special symbol stop pattern number determination process, the stop pattern number of the pattern to be processed is determined.
The ROM 220 stores a stop pattern number lottery table in which the correspondence between the winning pattern random number value and the stop pattern number (segment data) is registered.
In addition, as the stopping pattern number lottery tables, a lottery table for the stopping pattern number at the time of a big win corresponding to a "big win", a lottery table for the stopping pattern number at the time of a small win corresponding to a "small win", and a lottery table for the stopping pattern number at the time of a loss corresponding to a "miss" are stored.
In addition, as the lottery tables for the stop pattern number at the time of a jackpot, a lottery table for the stop pattern number at the time of a jackpot corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information) and a lottery table for the stop pattern number at the time of a jackpot corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information) are stored.
Furthermore, as stopping pattern number lottery tables corresponding to a "small win", a stopping pattern number lottery table at the time of a small win corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information) and a stopping pattern number lottery table at the time of a small win corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information) are stored.

In the special symbol stop pattern number determination process, first, the result of the special symbol hit determination is confirmed.
Then, when it is determined that the special winning symbol is a "jackpot" (a winning symbol), the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is checked, and the winning symbol number lottery table corresponding to this check result is read out. Then, the stopping symbol number is determined based on the winning symbol random number included in the start judgment target game information and the reading out winning symbol number lottery table.
On the other hand, if the special winning judgment determines that the player has won a small prize (a win), the system checks the value set in the target symbol discrimination flag area and reads out the lottery table for the stop symbol number at the time of the small prize corresponding to the result of the check.Then, the system determines the stop symbol number based on the winning symbol random number included in the game information for start judgment and the lottery table for the stop symbol number at the time of the small prize that has been read out.
On the other hand, if the special winning judgment results in a "miss" (losing), the lottery table for the stop pattern number at the time of losing is read out. Then, the stop pattern number is determined based on the winning pattern random number included in the game information subject to start judgment and the lottery table for the stop pattern number at the time of losing that has been read out.
Here, the RAM 230 is provided with a stopping pattern number memory area corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information) and a stopping pattern number memory area corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information).
Then, in the stopping symbol number determination process, the determined stopping symbol number is stored in a stopping symbol number storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed.
At this time, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the determined stopping pattern number is stored in a stopping pattern number memory area corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information).
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", the determined stopping pattern number is stored in a stopping pattern number memory area corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information).

In step S11-12, a special pattern change pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-13. In the special pattern change pattern determination process, the change mode (type of change mode and type of change pattern) of the pattern to be processed is determined.
In the special chart fluctuation pattern determination process, when a "jackpot" is determined by the special chart hit determination process, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined by the winning time fluctuation pattern determination process described below.
On the other hand, if the special winning judgment determines that the winning ticket is a "miss," the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) are determined by the losing fluctuation pattern judgment process described below.
On the other hand, when the special winning judgment determines that the winning is a "small winning", the winning time fluctuation pattern judgment process and the losing time fluctuation pattern judgment process are used to determine the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern). At this time, based on the game state ("game state A" to "game state D") and the reserved type (special winning game information or special winning game information), one of the winning time fluctuation pattern judgment processes and the losing time fluctuation pattern judgment process is selected.
Specifically, as shown in Figure 8 (a), when the result of the special winning judgment is "small winning", the current game state is "game state A", and the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", the loss time variation pattern judgment process is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the special winning judgment is "small winning", and the current game state is "game state A", and the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the winning time change pattern judgment process is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the special winning judgment is "small winning", and the current game state is "game state B", and the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", the winning time change pattern judgment process is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the special winning judgment is "small winning", and the current game state is "game state B", and the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the loss-time fluctuation pattern judgment process is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the special winning judgment is "small winning", and the current game state is "game state C", and the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", the winning time change pattern judgment process is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the special winning judgment is "small winning", and the current game state is "game state C", and the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the winning time change pattern judgment process is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the special winning judgment is "small winning", and the current game state is "game state D", and the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", the winning time change pattern judgment process is selected.
On the other hand, if the result of the special winning judgment is "small winning", and the current game state is "game state D", and the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the loss-time fluctuation pattern judgment process is selected.

In the winning fluctuation pattern determination process, first, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) is determined (winning fluctuation mode determination).
In determining the winning time variation mode, first, the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area, the current game state ("game state A" to "game state D"), the type of the stopped pattern determined by the special pattern determination, and the current value of the special variation counter are confirmed, and the winning time variation mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information subject to start judgment and the winning time fluctuation mode judgment table that has been read, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the winning time fluctuation pattern judgment table are determined.
In the process of determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of winning, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is then determined (determination of the fluctuation pattern at the time of winning).
In the winning time fluctuation pattern determination, first, a winning time fluctuation pattern determination table determined by the winning time fluctuation mode determination is read out.
Then, the variation pattern number (type of variation pattern) is determined based on the variation pattern random number included in the game information subject to start determination and the winning time variation pattern determination table that has been read out.
In this embodiment, in each winning time fluctuation pattern determination table, a fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to a "normal reach fluctuation" and a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to a "super reach fluctuation" are specified (a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to a "no reach fluctuation" is not registered).
As a result, in the winning time fluctuation pattern determination process, a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to a "normal reach fluctuation" or a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to a "super reach fluctuation" is selected as the fluctuation pattern number.

In the process of determining the fluctuation pattern when losing, first, the type of reach group random number contained in the game information subject to start determination ('undefined value' or 'fixed value') is determined (random number type determination).
In determining the random number type, if the value of the reach group random number contained in the start determination target game information is less than "8500", it is determined to be an "indefinite value", and if it is "8500" or greater, it is determined to be a "fixed value".
In the process of determining the fluctuation pattern when losing, the reach group number (reach group type) is next determined (reach group determination).
In the reach group judgment, if the random number type judgment determines that the number is a "fixed value," the reach group judgment table corresponding to the "fixed value" is read out. On the other hand, if the random number type judgment determines that the number is an "indefinite value," the reach group judgment table corresponding to the "indefinite value" is read out. Then, the reach group number (type of reach group) is judged based on the reach group random number included in the start judgment target game information and the reach group judgment table that has been read out.
In the process of determining the fluctuation pattern when an election is lost, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) is then determined (determination of the fluctuation mode when an election is lost).
In determining the fluctuation mode when a player loses, the reach group number determined by the reach group determination, the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area, the value of the reserved number counter corresponding to the processing target pattern (special pattern 1 reserved number counter or special pattern 2 reserved number counter), the current game state ("game state A" to "game state D"), and the current value of the special fluctuation counter are confirmed, and the loss-time fluctuation mode determination table corresponding to the confirmation result is read out.
Then, based on the reach mode random number included in the game information subject to start judgment and the read out fluctuation mode judgment table when losing, the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) and the fluctuation pattern judgment table when losing are judged.
In the process of determining the fluctuation pattern when an election is lost, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is then determined (determination of the fluctuation pattern when an election is lost).
In the loss-time fluctuation pattern judgment, first, a loss-time fluctuation pattern judgment table judged by the loss-time fluctuation mode judgment is read out.
Then, the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) is determined based on the fluctuation pattern random number included in the game information to be judged as the start determination target and the read fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of losing.
Here, in the loss-time fluctuation pattern determination tail corresponding to the fixed value reach group, a fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to "normal reach fluctuation" and a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "super reach fluctuation" are specified (a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "no reach fluctuation" is not registered).
On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tail at the time of loss corresponding to the indefinite value reach group, a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "no reach fluctuation" is specified as the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) (a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "normal reach fluctuation" and a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "super reach fluctuation" are not specified).
As a result, when the random number type determination determines that the random number is a "fixed value," the variation pattern number corresponding to the "normal reach variation" or the "super reach variation" is selected as the variation pattern number. On the other hand, when the random number type determination determines that the random number is an "indefinite value," the variation pattern number corresponding to the "no reach variation" is selected as the variation pattern number.

In step S11-13, a fluctuation pattern command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-14. In the fluctuation pattern command setting process, a fluctuation mode designation command that designates the fluctuation mode number (type of fluctuation mode) determined in step S11-12 is stored in a subcommand output request buffer.
In addition, a fluctuation pattern designation command that designates the fluctuation pattern number (type of fluctuation pattern) determined in step S11-12 is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S11-14, a special symbol variation time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-15. In the special symbol variation time setting process, the time for the variation display of the special symbol is set.
Specifically, in the special chart variable time setting process, first, the variable time (hereinafter referred to as "variable time 1") corresponding to the variable mode number determined in step S11-12 is obtained.
In addition, the fluctuation time (hereinafter referred to as "fluctuation time 2") corresponding to the fluctuation pattern number determined in step S11-12 is obtained.
Then, the total time of the acquired variable time 1 and variable time 2 is calculated, and the calculated total time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed.

In step S11-15, a special pattern variable display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-16. In the special pattern variable display data setting process, data for controlling the variable display of the special pattern display device corresponding to the processing target pattern is set.
Specifically, in the special pattern change display data setting process, first, a predetermined display time is set in the special pattern display timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed.
Next, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", a predetermined initial value is set in the special pattern 2 display pattern counter. As a result, among a predetermined number of segments constituting the special pattern 2 display device, a segment corresponding to the value of the special pattern 2 display pattern counter is controlled to be lit.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", a predetermined initial value is set in the special pattern 1 display counter. As a result, among a predetermined number of segments constituting the special pattern 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the special pattern 1 display counter is controlled to be lit.

In step S11-16, a game status update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S11-17. In the game status update process, the game status is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, first, it is determined whether or not the time-saving control is being executed. At this time, if the value set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230 is "1", it is determined that the time-saving control is being executed, and if the value is "0", it is determined that the time-saving control is not being executed.
If it is determined that the time-saving control is being executed, "1" is subtracted from the value of the time-saving counter, and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is "0" or less.
If it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter after the subtraction is equal to or less than "0", the time-saving control flag area is set to "0", thereby ending the time-saving control.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time-saving counter is not equal to or less than "0", the state in which "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area is maintained, so that the time-saving control continues.
In the game state update process, it is next determined whether or not a special symbol high probability state is occurring. At this time, if the value set in the special symbol high probability state flag area of the RAM 230 is "1", it is determined that the special symbol high probability state is occurring, and if it is "0", it is determined that the special symbol high probability state is not occurring.
When it is determined that a special high probability state is occurring, "1" is subtracted from the value of the probability counter, and it is determined whether the value of the probability counter after the subtraction is "0" or less.
Then, when it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter after subtraction is equal to or less than "0", the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "0". This ends the special chart high probability state and causes the special chart low probability state to occur.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the probability variation counter is not equal to or less than "0", the state in which "1" is set in the special chart high probability state flag area is maintained. This allows the special chart high probability state to continue.

In step S11-17, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2, S10-3).
In the special game phase update process, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", a value corresponding to the "special game phase changing state" is set in the special game phase flag area for special game pattern 2.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", a value corresponding to the "special pattern 1 changing state" is set in the special pattern 1 special game phase flag area.
In step S11-18, a customer waiting setting process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2, S10-3). In the customer waiting setting process, a demo designation command that designates that a customer waiting state has started for the target symbol is stored in the subcommand output request buffer of the RAM 230.

(Special chart change processing)
Next, the special chart changing process executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5 will be described.
FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing processing during special chart change.
When the special chart change process is executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5, as shown in FIG. 28, the process first proceeds to step S12-1.
In step S12-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S12-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-4.
In step S12-2, it is determined whether the value of the special chart display timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special chart display timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-3. If it is determined that the value of the special chart display timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2, S10-3).
In step S12-3, a special pattern variable display data update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2, S10-3). In the special pattern variable display data update process, data for controlling the variable display of the special pattern display device (special pattern 1 display device or special pattern 2 display device) corresponding to the processing target pattern is updated.
Specifically, in the special chart change display data update process, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", "1" is added to the value of the special chart 2 display pattern counter.
On the other hand, in the special chart change display data update process, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", "1" is added to the value of the special chart 1 display pattern counter.

In step S12-4, it is determined whether the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed specifies a "jackpot pattern"("jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 5") or a "small win pattern"("small win pattern 1"), and if it is determined that the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed specifies a "jackpot pattern" or a "small win pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-5, and if it is determined that the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed does not specify a "jackpot pattern" or a "small win pattern" (specifies a "miss pattern") (No), the process proceeds to step S12-8.
Here, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", it is determined whether the pattern information stored in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area specifies a "big win pattern" or a "small win pattern".
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", it is determined whether the pattern information stored in the special pattern 1 pattern information memory area specifies a "big win pattern" or a "small win pattern".
In step S12-5, it is determined whether or not the non-target symbol is being displayed in a changing state (during the changing time), and if it is determined that the non-target symbol is being displayed in a changing state (Yes), the process proceeds to step S12-6, and if it is determined that the non-target symbol is not being displayed in a changing state (No), the process proceeds to step S12-8.
Here, when the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", it is determined whether or not the non-processing target pattern is being displayed based on the value set in the special pattern 1 special game phase flag area. At this time, if the value set in the special pattern 1 special game phase flag area is a value corresponding to the "special pattern 1 changing state", it is determined that the non-processing target pattern is being displayed, and if it is not a value corresponding to the "special pattern 1 changing state", it is determined that the non-processing target pattern is not being displayed.
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", it is determined whether or not the non-processing target symbol is being displayed based on the value set in the special symbol 2 special game phase flag area. At this time, if the value set in the special symbol 2 special game phase flag area is a value corresponding to the "special symbol 2 changing state", it is determined that the non-processing target symbol is being displayed, and if it is not a value corresponding to the "special symbol 2 changing state", it is determined that the non-processing target symbol is not being displayed.

In step S12-6, a non-processing target symbol rewrite process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-7. In the non-processing target symbol rewrite process, the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area (special symbol 1 symbol information storage area or special symbol 2 symbol information storage area) corresponding to the non-processing target symbol is rewritten to symbol information specifying a "loser symbol".
Specifically, in the non-processing target symbol rewrite process, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the symbol information stored in the special symbol 1 symbol information storage area is rewritten to symbol information specifying a "losing symbol". Also, the stopping symbol number stored in the stopping symbol number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol is rewritten to the stopping symbol number corresponding to the "losing symbol".
On the other hand, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the symbol information stored in the special symbol 2 symbol information storage area is rewritten to symbol information specifying a "losing symbol". Also, the stopping symbol number stored in the stopping symbol number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol is rewritten to a stopping symbol number corresponding to the "losing symbol".
In step S12-7, a non-target symbol stop process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-8. In the non-target symbol stop process, the value of the special game timer (the timer measuring the variable time) corresponding to the non-target symbol is set to "0".
Specifically, in the non-processing target symbol stop processing, when the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the value of the special game timer corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) is set to "0". As a result, in the next special symbol 1 special game management processing (step S10-2), the variable display of the first special symbol is ended and the stop display of the "losing symbol" is started.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the value of the special game timer corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information) is set to "0". As a result, in the next special symbol 2 special game management process (step S10-1), the variable display of the second special symbol is ended and the stop display of the "loser symbol" is started.

In step S12-8, a special symbol stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-9. In the special symbol stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the special symbol display device corresponding to the target symbol is set.
Specifically, in the special symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the target symbol is acquired. Then, the acquired stop symbol number is set in the special symbol display device corresponding to the target symbol.
At this time, if the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "1", the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information) is obtained. Then, the obtained stop symbol number is set in the special symbol 2 display device. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the special symbol 2 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop symbol number is controlled to light up (stop display).
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target symbol discrimination flag area is "0", the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) is obtained. Then, the obtained stop symbol number is set in the special symbol 1 display device. As a result, among a predetermined number of segments constituting the special symbol 1 display device, the segment corresponding to the set stop symbol number is controlled to light up (stop display).

In step S12-9, a special symbol stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-10. In the special symbol stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the symbol to be processed.
In step S12-10, a stop command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S12-11. In the stop command setting process, a stop command that specifies the stop of the target symbol is stored in a subcommand output request buffer. In addition, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [times]) is added to the value of the external information determination number counter.
In step S12-11, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next processes (steps S10-2, S10-3).
In the special game phase update process, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", a value corresponding to the "special game phase flag area for special game pattern 2 stopped pattern display state" is set.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", a value corresponding to the "special chart 1 stopped pattern display state" is set in the special chart 1 special game phase flag area.

(Special map stopped processing)
Next, the special chart stop processing executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5 will be described.
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing processing while a special chart is stopped.
When the special drawing stop processing is executed in steps S40-5 and S41-5, as shown in FIG. 29, the processing first proceeds to step S13-1.
In step S13-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the pattern to be processed is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S10-2, S10-3).
In step S13-2, it is determined whether the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed specifies a "jackpot pattern"("jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 5"), and if it is determined that the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed specifies a "jackpot pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-3, and if it is determined that the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed does not specify a "jackpot pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S13-8.
Here, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", it is determined whether or not the pattern information stored in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area specifies a "jackpot pattern".
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", it is determined whether or not the pattern information stored in the special pattern 1 pattern information memory area specifies a "jackpot pattern".
In step S13-3, a game status update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-4. In the game status update process, the game status is updated.
Specifically, in the game state update process, "0" is set in the special symbol high probability state flag area of the RAM 230. This causes a special symbol low probability state to occur. Also, "0" is set in the time-saving control flag area of the RAM 230. This causes the time-saving control to be stopped. As a result, the game state becomes "game state A."

In step S13-4, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-5. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the first special electric role 54a is set.
The ROM 220 stores special electric role control tables corresponding to each type of "jackpot symbol"("jackpot symbol 1" to "jackpot symbol 5"). Each special electric role control table specifies the effective time for closing the jackpot opening, the closing time for the jackpot opening, the number of rounds played, the number of open/close switches corresponding to each round of play, the control data (solenoid control data, control time data) of the first jackpot opening solenoid 65a corresponding to each open/close switch, and the control data (solenoid control data, control time data) of the V-area solenoid 66 during the V-round play.
In the special electric role control data setting process, a special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "jackpot pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed is read, and the read special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
At this time, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", a special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "jackpot pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area is read out, and the read out special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", a special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "jackpot pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area is read out, and the read out special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the special electric role continuous operation count counter is then set to "0".

In step S13-5, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-6. In the opening time setting process, a special electric combination control table set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game.
In step S13-6, an opening command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-7. In the opening command setting process, an opening command that specifies the type of "jackpot pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer. In addition, a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 1 [times]) is added to the value of the external information jackpot counter.
At this time, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", an opening designation command that specifies the type of "jackpot pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", an opening designation command that specifies the type of "jackpot pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S13-7, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next processes (steps S10-2, S10-3).
In the special game phase update process, first, the pattern information set in the pattern information storage area (special pattern 1 pattern information storage area or special pattern 2 pattern information storage area) corresponding to the processing target pattern is set (saved) in the confirmed pattern information storage area of the RAM 230, and then the pattern information storage area corresponding to the processing target pattern is cleared (initialized). At this time, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, pattern information specifying a "losing pattern") is set in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the processing target pattern.
In other words, when the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the pattern information set in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area is set (saved) in the confirmed pattern information storage area, and then a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, pattern information designating a "losing pattern") is set in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", the pattern information set in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area is set (saved) in the confirmed pattern information storage area, and then a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, pattern information specifying a "losing pattern") is set in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area.
In addition, in the special game phase flag area when winning, a value corresponding to the "state before the big prize opening is opened when a big win occurs" is set.
Furthermore, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", a value corresponding to "special pattern 2 change waiting state" is set in the special pattern 2 special game phase flag area.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", a value corresponding to "special pattern 1 change waiting state" is set in the special pattern 1 special game phase flag area.

In step S13-8, it is determined whether the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed specifies a "small win pattern"("small win pattern 1"), and if it is determined that the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed specifies a "small win pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S13-9, and if it is determined that the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed does not specify a "small win pattern" (specifies a "losing pattern") (No), the process proceeds to step S13-13.
Here, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", it is determined whether or not the pattern information stored in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area specifies a "small winning pattern".
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", it is determined whether or not the pattern information stored in the special pattern 1 pattern information memory area specifies a "small winning pattern".

In step S13-9, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-10. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the second special electric role 55a is set.
A special electric control table corresponding to each type of "small winning symbol" is stored in the ROM 220. The special electric control table corresponding to each type of "small winning symbol" specifies the effective time for closing the large winning hole, the closing time for the large winning hole, the number of small winning games, the number of opening/closing switches corresponding to each small winning game, and the control data (solenoid control data, control time data) of the second large winning hole solenoid 65b corresponding to each opening/closing switch.
In the special electric role control data setting process, a special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "small winning pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the pattern to be processed is read, and the read special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
At this time, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", a special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "small winning pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area is read out, and the read out special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", a special electric role control table corresponding to the type of "small winning pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area is read out, and the read out special electric role control table is set in the special electric role control table area of RAM 230.
In the special electric role control data setting process, the special electric role continuous operation count counter is then set to "0".

In step S13-10, an opening time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-11. In the opening time setting process, a special electric combination control table set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined opening time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game.
In step S13-11, an opening command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S13-12. In the opening command setting process, an opening command specifying the type of "small winning symbol" specified by the symbol information stored in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
At this time, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", an opening designation command specifying the type of "small winning pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", an opening designation command specifying the type of "small winning pattern" specified by the pattern information stored in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S13-12, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next processes (steps S10-2, S10-3).
In the special game phase update process, first, the pattern information set in the pattern information storage area (special pattern 1 pattern information storage area or special pattern 2 pattern information storage area) corresponding to the processing target pattern is set (saved) in the confirmed pattern information storage area of the RAM 230, and then the pattern information storage area corresponding to the processing target pattern is cleared (initialized). At this time, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, pattern information specifying a "losing pattern") is set in the pattern information storage area corresponding to the processing target pattern.
In other words, when the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", the pattern information set in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area is set (saved) in the confirmed pattern information storage area, and then a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, pattern information designating a "losing pattern") is set in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", the pattern information set in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area is set (saved) in the confirmed pattern information storage area, and then a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, pattern information specifying a "losing pattern") is set in the special pattern 1 pattern information storage area.
In addition, in the special game phase flag area when a win occurs, a value corresponding to the "state before the large prize opening is opened when a small win occurs" is set.
Furthermore, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", a value corresponding to "special pattern 2 change waiting state" is set in the special pattern 2 special game phase flag area.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", a value corresponding to "special pattern 1 change waiting state" is set in the special pattern 1 special game phase flag area.
In step S13-13, a special game phase update process is executed, and the series of processes is ended, and the process proceeds to the next processes (steps S10-2, S10-3).
In the special game phase update process, first, the symbol information storage area (special symbol 1 symbol information storage area or special symbol 2 symbol information storage area) corresponding to the symbol to be processed is cleared (initialized). At this time, a predetermined initial value (symbol information specifying a "losing symbol" in this embodiment) is set in the symbol information storage area corresponding to the symbol to be processed.
In other words, when the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, pattern information specifying a "losing pattern") is set in the special pattern 2 pattern information storage area.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, pattern information specifying a "losing pattern") is set in the special pattern 1 pattern information memory area.
In addition, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "1", a value corresponding to "special pattern 2 change waiting state" is set in the special pattern 2 special game phase flag area.
On the other hand, if the value set in the processing target pattern discrimination flag area is "0", a value corresponding to "special pattern 1 change waiting state" is set in the special pattern 1 special game phase flag area.

(Processing before opening the big prize hole)
Next, the pre-opening process of the big prize opening executed in step S42-4 will be described.
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the processing before the large prize opening is opened.
When the pre-opening process for the large prize opening is executed in step S42-4, the process first proceeds to step S14-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S14-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S14-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S14-2, a special electric role continuous operation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-3. In the special electric role continuous operation counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter.
In step S14-3, a round start command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-4. In the round start command setting process, the round start command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S14-4, a special electric role open/close switching count setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-5. In the special electric role open/close switching count setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced to read the open/close switching count corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation count counter. The read open/close switching count is then set in the special electric role open/close switching count counter.
In the special electric role opening/closing switching count setting process, the value of the special electric role winning count counter is then set to "0".
In step S14-5, a special electric service open/close switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S14-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S14-6, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "big prize opening control state upon big win" is set in the special game phase flag area upon winning.

(Big prize opening control process)
Next, the special prize opening control process executed in step S42-4 will be described.
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the large prize opening control process.
When the special prize opening control process is executed in step S42-4, the process first proceeds to step S16-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S16-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-4.
In step S16-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S16-3. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5.
In step S16-3, a special electric service open/close switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-4. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S16-4, it is determined whether the value of the special electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]), and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning number counter has reached the predetermined upper limit value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S16-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S16-5, the special prize opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-6. In the special prize opening control end process, the solenoid control data for stopping the current is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This causes the first special electric device 54a to be controlled to a closed state.
In step S16-6, a special prize opening closure effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-7. In the special prize opening closure effective time setting process, a special prize opening closure effective time (interval time) is set in a special game timer corresponding to a winning game by referring to a special prize opening control table set in a special prize opening control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S16-7, a round end command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S16-8. In the round end command setting process, the round end command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S16-8, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "big prize opening closure enabled state upon big win" is set in the special game phase flag area upon winning.

(Special electric service opening and closing switching process)
Next, the special electric utility opening/closing switching process of steps S14-5 and S16-3 will be described.
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the special electric service opening/closing switching process.
When the special electric service opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S14-5 and S16-3, as shown in FIG. 32, the process first proceeds to step S15-1.
In step S15-1, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S15-2. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S14-6, S16-4).

In step S15-2, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-3. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the first special electric role 54a to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric role control data setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced to read out solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the special electric role open/close switching count counter. Then, the read out solenoid control data (control data specifying whether to energize or stop energizing) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This starts the control of the first large winning port solenoid 65a based on the set solenoid data, and the first special electric role 54a is controlled to be in an open or closed state.

In step S15-3, a special electric control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S15-4. In the special electric control time setting process, a control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S15-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric role control time setting process, the control time corresponding to the value of the special electric role open/close switch count counter is read out by referring to the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game.
In step S15-4, a special electric service open/close switching count counter update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S14-6 or S16-4). In the special electric service open/close switching count counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the special electric service open/close switching count counter.

(Large prize winning hole closure effective processing)
Next, the big prize opening closing validity process executed in step S42-4 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the large prize opening closure validity process.
When the special prize opening closure validation process is executed in step S42-4, the process first proceeds to step S17-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S17-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S17-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached a specified value. If it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S17-3. If it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S17-5.
Here, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and the number of rounds of play specified in the special electric role control table is obtained as a specified value to make a judgment.
In step S17-3, a special prize opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-4. In the special prize opening closing time setting process, a special prize opening closing time is set in a special game timer corresponding to a winning game by referring to a special prize control table set in a special prize control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S17-4, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before the big prize opening is opened when a big win occurs" is set in the special game phase flag area when a big win occurs.

In step S17-5, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-6. In the ending time setting process, a special electric combination control table set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game.
In step S17-6, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S17-7. In the ending designation command setting process, the ending designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S17-7, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "waiting state for the end of the opening of the big prize opening upon a big win" is set in the special game phase flag area upon winning.

(Wait processing for the end of the large prize opening)
Next, the waiting process for the end of the large prize opening, which is executed in step S42-4, will be described.
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the large prize opening.
When the waiting process for the completion of the opening of the large prize opening is executed in step S42-4, the process first proceeds to step S18-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S18-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S18-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S18-2, a game state setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S18-3. In the game state setting process, the game state after the end of the big win game state is set.
Specifically, in the game status setting process, first, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the special variable counter.
In the game state setting process, next, a probability state setting process is executed.
In the probability state setting process, first, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the V winning flag area of RAM 230.
Then, when it is determined that "1" is set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230, a predetermined number of times of probability change (10,000 times in this embodiment) is set as the value of the probability change number counter, and "1" is set in the special chart high probability state flag area. As a result, the game state after the end of the big win game state becomes the special chart high probability state.
On the other hand, if it is determined that "1" is not set in the V winning flag area of the RAM 230 ("0" is set), the special chart high probability state flag area is set to "0". As a result, the game state after the end of the big win game state becomes the special chart low probability state.

In the game status setting process, next, a time-saving count setting process is executed.
In the time-saving count setting process, the type of stopping pattern ("jackpot pattern") specified by the pattern information stored in the confirmed pattern information storage area, the game status at the time of start determination (when a special pattern hit is determined), and the value of the V winning flag area are confirmed, and the number of time-saving times according to the confirmation results is set in the time-saving counter.
In this case, if the stopping pattern is "jackpot pattern 1", the game state at the time of start determination is "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area is "0", the number of time-saving times = 100 [times] is set in the time-saving counter, and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area.
On the other hand, if the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 1", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "1", the number of time-saving times = 10,000 [times] is set in the time-saving counter, and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area.
On the other hand, if the stopping pattern is "jackpot pattern 2", the game state at the time of start determination is "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area is "0", the number of time-saving times = 100 [times] is set in the time-saving counter, and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area.
On the other hand, if the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 2", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "1", the number of time-saving times = 10,000 [times] is set in the time-saving counter, and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area.
On the other hand, if the stopping pattern is "jackpot pattern 3", the game state at the time of start determination is "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area is "0", the number of time-saving times = 100 [times] is set in the time-saving counter, and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area.
On the other hand, if the stopping pattern is "jackpot pattern 3", the game state at the time of start determination is "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area is "1", the number of time-saving times is set to 0 [times] in the time-saving counter, and "0" is set in the time-saving control flag area.
On the other hand, if the stopping pattern is "jackpot pattern 4", the game state at the time of start determination is "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area is "0", the number of time-saving times = 100 [times] is set in the time-saving counter, and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area.
On the other hand, if the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 4", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "1", the number of time-saving times = 10,000 [times] is set in the time-saving counter, and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area.
On the other hand, if the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 5", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "0", the number of time-saving times = 100 [times] is set in the time-saving counter, and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area.
On the other hand, if the stopping pattern = "jackpot pattern 5", the game state at the time of start determination = "game state A" to "game state D", and the value of the V winning flag area = "1", the number of time-saving times = 10,000 [times] is set in the time-saving counter, and "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area.
As described above, when "0" is set in the time-saving control flag area, the time-saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot game state, and when "1" is set in the time-saving control flag area, the time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game state.

In the game status setting process, next, a flag initialization process is executed.
In the flag initialization process, the V-winning flag area is set to "0." Also, a predetermined initial value ("0" in this embodiment) is set as the value of the post-jackpot spin counter.
As a result of the above, one of the gaming states "gaming state A" to "gaming state D" is set as the gaming state after the end of the big win gaming state.

In step S18-3, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, first, the determined symbol information storage area is cleared (initialized). Also, a value corresponding to the "special electric device non-operation state" is set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning.

(Processing before opening the large prize hole when a small win occurs)
Next, the process before opening the large prize opening when a small win occurs, which is executed in step S42-4, will be described.
Figure 35 is a flowchart showing the processing before the large prize opening is opened when a small win occurs.
When the pre-opening process for the large prize winning port upon a small win is executed in step S42-4, the process first proceeds to step S50-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S50-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S50-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S50-2, a special electric role continuous operation counter update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-3. In the special electric role continuous operation counter update process, "1" is added to the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter.
In step S50-3, a round start command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-4. In the round start command setting process, the round start command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.

In step S50-4, a special electric role open/close switching count setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-5. In the special electric role open/close switching count setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced to read the open/close switching count corresponding to the value of the special electric role continuous operation count counter. The read open/close switching count is then set in the special electric role open/close switching count counter.
In the special electric role opening/closing switching count setting process, the value of the special electric role winning count counter is then set to "0".
In step S50-5, a special electric service open/close switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S50-6. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S50-6, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large prize opening control state upon small win" is set in the special game phase flag area upon winning.

(Control process for opening the large prize hole when a small prize is won)
Next, the process for controlling the opening of the large prize opening when a small win occurs, which is executed in step S42-4, will be described.
Figure 36 is a flowchart showing the process for controlling the opening of the large prize opening when a small win occurs.
When the small win large prize opening opening control process is executed in step S42-4, as shown in FIG. 36, the process first proceeds to step S51-1.
In step S51-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S51-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S51-4.
In step S51-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S51-3. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S51-5.
In step S51-3, a special electric service open/close switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S51-4. The special electric service open/close switching process will be described later.
In step S51-4, it is determined whether the value of the special electric winning number counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 10 [balls]), and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning number counter has reached the predetermined upper limit value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S51-5, and if it is determined that the value of the special electric winning number counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S51-5, the special prize opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S51-6. In the special prize opening control end process, the solenoid control data for specifying the power supply stop is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This causes the second special electric device 55a to be controlled to the closed state.
In step S51-6, a special prize opening closure effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S51-7. In the special prize opening closure effective time setting process, a special prize opening closure effective time (interval time) is set in a special game timer corresponding to a winning game by referring to a special prize opening control table set in a special prize opening control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S51-7, a round end command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S51-8. In the round end command setting process, the round end command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S51-8, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "large prize opening closure enabled state upon small win" is set in the special game phase flag area upon winning.

(Special electric service opening and closing switching process)
Next, the special electric utility opening/closing switching process of steps S50-5 and S51-3 will be described.
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the special electric service opening/closing switching process.
When the special electric utility opening/closing switching process is executed in steps S50-5 and S51-3, as shown in FIG. 37, the process first proceeds to step S52-1.
In step S52-1, it is determined whether the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S52-2. If it is determined that the value of the special electric service opening/closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S50-6, S51-4).

In step S52-2, a special electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S52-3. In the special electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the second special electric role 55a to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the special electric role control data setting process, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced to read out solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the special electric role open/close switching count counter. Then, the read out solenoid control data (control data specifying whether to energize or stop energizing) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This starts the control of the second large winning port solenoid 65b based on the set solenoid data, and the second special electric role 55a is controlled to be in an open or closed state.

In step S52-3, a special electric control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S52-4. In the special electric control time setting process, a control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S52-2 is set.
Specifically, in the special electric role control time setting process, the control time corresponding to the value of the special electric role open/close switch count counter is read out by referring to the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read control time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game.
In step S52-4, a special electric service open/close switching count counter update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S50-6 or S51-4). In the special electric service open/close switching count counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the special electric service open/close switching count counter.

(Large prize winning hole closure effective processing when small win occurs)
Next, the process of closing the large prize opening when a small win occurs, which is executed in step S42-4, will be described.
Figure 38 is a flowchart showing the process of closing the large prize opening when a small win occurs.
When the process for enabling closure of the large prize winning hole upon a small win is executed in step S42-4, the process first proceeds to step S53-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S53-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S53-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).

In step S53-2, it is determined whether the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached a specified value. If it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has not reached the specified value (No), the process proceeds to step S53-3. If it is determined that the value of the special electric role continuous operation counter has reached the specified value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S53-5.
Here, the special electric role control table set in the special electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and the number of rounds of play specified in the special electric role control table is obtained as a specified value to make a judgment.
In step S53-3, a special prize opening closing time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S53-4. In the special prize opening closing time setting process, a special prize opening closing time is set in a special game timer corresponding to a winning game by referring to a special prize control table set in a special prize control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S53-4, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "state before the large prize opening is opened when a small win occurs" is set in the special game phase flag area when a win occurs.

In step S53-5, an ending time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S53-6. In the ending time setting process, a special electric combination control table set in the special electric combination control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined ending time is set in the special game timer corresponding to the winning game.
In step S53-6, an ending designation command setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S53-7. In the ending designation command setting process, the ending designation command is stored in the subcommand output request buffer.
In step S53-7, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "waiting state for the end of opening of the large prize opening upon small win" is set in the special game phase flag area upon winning.

(Wait processing to end large prize opening when small win occurs)
Next, the waiting process for the end of the large prize winning port opening at the time of a small win, which is executed in step S42-4, will be described.
Figure 39 is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the large prize opening when a small win occurs.
When the waiting process for the end of the large prize winning port opening upon a small win is executed in step S42-4, as shown in FIG. 39, the process first proceeds to step S59-1.
In step S59-1, it is determined whether the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S59-2. If it is determined that the value of the special game timer corresponding to the winning game is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In step S59-2, a special game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-14).
In the special game phase update process, first, the determined symbol information storage area is cleared (initialized). Also, a value corresponding to the "special electric device non-operation state" is set in the special game phase flag area at the time of winning.

(Regular game management processing)
Next, the normal game management process in step S4-14 will be described.
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the normal game management process.
In this embodiment, the following situations are defined as game situations based on the regular pattern display device (regular pattern) (hereinafter referred to as the "regular pattern regular game phase"): a "regular pattern change waiting state," a "regular pattern changing state," and a "regular pattern stop display state."
In addition, as the phases (hereinafter referred to as "normal game phase when winning") related to the game based on the normal electric device 53a (normal winning game state), a "normal electric device pre-opening state", a "normal electric device opening control state", a "normal electric device closing effective state", a "normal electric device opening end waiting state", and a "normal electric device non-operating state" are specified.

In addition, the RAM 230 is provided with a normal game phase flag area and a winning normal game phase flag area.
In the normal game phase flag area, a value (normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the normal game phases, "waiting for normal game change", "normal game change in progress" and "normal game stop pattern display state", is set (stored). This allows the normal game phase to be specified (determined) based on the value set in the normal game phase flag area.
In the winning normal game phase flag area, a value (winning normal game phase flag) corresponding to one of the winning normal game phases, among "normal electric device pre-opening state", "normal electric device opening control state", "normal electric device closing effective state", "normal electric device opening end waiting state" and "normal electric device non-operating state", is set (stored). This makes it possible to specify (determine) the winning normal game phase based on the value set in the winning normal game phase flag area.

Furthermore, the ROM 220 stores, as normal game control modules (programs) for controlling (executing) special games, special game control modules corresponding to each normal game phase of a normal game and normal game control modules corresponding to each normal game phase at the time of winning (excluding the "normal electric device non-operating state").
Then, in the normal game management process, a normal game control module corresponding to the value set in the normal game phase flag area (normal game phase flag area, normal game phase flag area when winning) of RAM 230 is selected, and processing based on the selected normal game control module is executed.

Specifically, when the normal game management process is executed in step S4-14, as shown in FIG. 40, the process first proceeds to step S55-1.
In step S55-1, a normal game management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S55-2. The normal game management process will be described later.
In step S55-2, a winning regular game management process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). The winning regular game management process will be described later.

(Regular game management processing)
Next, the normal game management process executed in step S55-1 will be described.
FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the normal game management process.
When the normal game management process is executed in step S55-1, as shown in FIG. 41, the process first proceeds to step S56-1.
In step S56-1, it is determined whether or not the normal electric role is not in operation. If it is determined that the normal electric role is not in operation (Yes), the process proceeds to step S56-2. If it is determined that the normal electric role is not in operation (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
Here, if the value set in the normal game phase flag area of RAM 230 at the time of winning is a value corresponding to the "normal electric device not operating state", it is determined that the normal electric device is not operating state, and if the value is not corresponding to the "normal electric device not operating state", it is determined that the normal electric device is not operating state.
In step S56-2, a normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S56-3. In the normal game phase acquisition process, a value (normal game phase) set in the normal game phase flag area of the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S56-3, a normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S56-4. In the normal game control module acquisition process, the special game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase) acquired in step S56-2 is read out.
In step S56-4, a normal game control module execution process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2). In the normal game control module execution process, a process based on the normal game control module read out in step S56-3 is started.
Specifically, in the normal game control module execution processing, if the value acquired in step S56-2 is a value corresponding to the "normal map change waiting state", the normal map change waiting processing described below is started, if the value is a value corresponding to the "normal map changing state", the normal map changing processing described below is started, and if the value is a value corresponding to the "normal map stop pattern display state", the normal map stop processing described below is started.

(Regular game management process when winning)
Next, the winning regular game management process executed in step S55-2 will be described.
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the normal game management process when a prize is won.
When the winning regular game management process is executed in step S55-2, as shown in FIG. 42, the process first proceeds to step S57-1.
In step S57-1, a normal game phase acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S57-2. In the normal game phase acquisition process, a value (normal game phase at the time of winning) set in the normal game phase flag area in the RAM 230 is acquired (loaded).
In step S57-2, it is determined whether the value obtained in step S57-1 (normal game phase at the time of winning) is a value corresponding to the "normal electric device not operating state", and if it is determined that the value does not correspond to the "normal electric device not operating state" (No), the process proceeds to step S57-3, and if it is determined that the value corresponds to the "normal electric device not operating state" (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S57-3, a normal game control module acquisition process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S57-4. In the normal game control module acquisition process, a normal game control module corresponding to the value (normal game phase at the time of winning) acquired in step S57-1 is read out.

In step S57-4, a normal game control module execution process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15). In the normal game control module execution process, a process based on the special game control module read out in step S57-3 is started.
Specifically, in the normal game control module execution processing, if the value acquired in step S57-1 is a value corresponding to the "normal electric feature pre-opening state", the normal electric feature pre-opening processing described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal electric feature opening control state", the normal electric feature opening control processing described below is started; if the value corresponds to the "normal electric feature closing effective state", the normal electric feature closing effective processing described below is started; and if the value corresponds to the "normal electric feature opening end wait state", the normal electric feature opening end wait processing described below is started.

(Waiting for normal map changes)
Next, the normal map change waiting process executed in step S55-1 will be described.
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the process of waiting for a change in the map.
When the map change waiting process is executed in step S55-1, the process first proceeds to step S20-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S20-1, it is determined whether the value of the regular map reservation counter is "1" or greater. If it is determined that the value of the regular map reservation counter is "1" or greater (Yes), the process proceeds to step S20-2. If it is determined that the value of the regular map reservation counter is not "1" or greater (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
In step S20-2, a process for updating the number of reserved ordinary maps is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-3. In the process for updating the number of reserved ordinary maps, the number of reserved ordinary maps is updated.
Specifically, in the regular map pending number update process, first, "1" is subtracted from the value of the regular map pending number counter.
Next, in the normal game information storage area, the memory area in which the normal game information is stored is shifted. That is, first, the memory contents of memory area 1 are shifted (moved) to memory area 0. Next, the memory contents of memory area 2 are shifted to memory area 1. Next, the memory contents of memory area 3 are shifted to memory area 2. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 are shifted to memory area 3. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 are cleared (initialized).

In step S20-3, a normal symbol winning/losing determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-4. In the normal symbol winning/losing determination process, the result of the normal symbol lottery is determined (normal symbol winning/losing determination) based on the normal symbol game information (hereinafter referred to as "game information to be determined") stored in the memory area 0 of the normal symbol game information storage area.
A normal symbol winning/losing lottery table in which winning values of the normal symbol lottery are registered is stored in the ROM 220. In addition, as the normal symbol winning/losing lottery table, a normal symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to when the time-saving control is being executed and a normal symbol winning/losing lottery table corresponding to when the time-saving control is stopped are stored.
In the regular winning/losing determination process, a regular winning/losing determination is performed based on the winning random number contained in the game information to be determined and a regular winning/losing lottery table corresponding to the current execution status (running or stopped) of the time-saving control.
At this time, if the value of the winning random number included in the game information to be judged matches the winning value registered in the regular pattern winning/losing lottery table, the result of the regular pattern lottery is judged to be a "win" (a win).
On the other hand, if the value of the winning random number included in the game information to be judged does not match the winning value registered in the regular pattern winning/losing lottery table, the result of the regular pattern lottery is judged to be a "miss" (losing).

In step S20-4, a normal stop symbol determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-5. In the normal stop symbol determination process, the type of the normal stop symbol (stop symbol number) is determined (normal stop symbol determination).
Specifically, in the normal winning/losing determination process, if the normal winning/losing determination determines that the winning symbol is a "win" (a prize), the type of the winning symbol (winning symbol number) is determined to be a "normal winning symbol."
On the other hand, if the normal winning/losing judgment results in a "lose" (failure), the type of stopping pattern (stopping pattern number) is judged to be a "losing pattern."
Next, the type of the determined stop symbol (stop symbol number) is stored in the stop symbol storage area of the RAM 230.
In step S20-5, a normal pattern variation pattern determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-6. In the normal pattern variation pattern determination process, the type of the normal pattern variation pattern (variation pattern number) is determined (normal pattern variation pattern determination).
Specifically, in the normal map fluctuation pattern determination process, when the time-saving control is stopped, the type of normal map fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern number) is determined to be the first type (in this embodiment, the type corresponding to a fluctuation time of 2.0 [s]).
On the other hand, when time-saving control is being executed, the second type (in this embodiment, the type corresponding to a fluctuation time of 0.5 [s]) is determined as the type (fluctuation pattern number) of the normal fluctuation pattern.

In step S20-6, a normal game variable time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-7. In the normal game variable time setting process, a variable time corresponding to the type of normal game variable pattern (variation pattern number) determined in step S20-6 is obtained. The obtained variable time is then set in the normal game timer.
In step S20-7, a general map change display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S20-8. In the general map change display data setting process, data for controlling the change display of the general map display device is set.
Specifically, in the process of setting the map change display data, first, a predetermined display time is set in the map display timer.
Next, a predetermined initial value is set in the normal map display pattern counter. This controls the lighting of the segments corresponding to the value of the normal map display pattern counter among a predetermined number of segments constituting the normal map display device.
In step S20-8, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game changing state" is set in the normal game phase flag area.

(Processing during normal map fluctuations)
Next, the normal map change process executed in step S55-1 will be described.
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the processing during normal map fluctuation.
When the normal map fluctuation processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 44, the process first proceeds to step S21-1.
In step S21-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S21-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-4.
In step S21-2, it is determined whether the value of the general map display timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the general map display timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S21-3, and if it is determined that the value of the general map display timer is not "0" (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
In step S21-3, a general map change display data update process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2). In the general map change display data update process, data for controlling the change display of the general map display device is updated.
Specifically, in the regular map change display data update process, "1" is added to the value of the regular map display pattern counter.

In step S21-4, a general map stop display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-5. In the general map stop display data setting process, data for controlling the stop display of the general map display device is set.
Specifically, in the normal symbol stop display data setting process, the stop symbol number stored in the stop symbol memory area of the RAM 230 is obtained.
Next, the acquired stop pattern number is set as the value of the normal map display pattern counter. As a result, among the predetermined number of segments constituting the normal map display device, the segment corresponding to the value of the normal map display pattern counter is controlled to light up (stop display).
In step S21-5, a normal game stop time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S21-6. In the normal game stop time setting process, a predetermined stop time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S21-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal game stop pattern display state" is set in the normal game phase flag area.

(Processing during normal map suspension)
Next, the normal map stop processing executed in step S55-1 will be described.
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the processing during normal map stop.
When the normal map stop processing is executed in step S19-3, as shown in FIG. 45, the process first proceeds to step S22-1.
In step S22-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
In step S22-2, it is determined whether the stopping pattern is a "normal winning pattern" or not, and if it is determined that the stopping pattern is not a "normal winning pattern" (No), the process proceeds to step S22-3, and if it is determined that the stopping pattern is a "normal winning pattern" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S22-4.
In step S22-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "waiting for normal game change state" is set in the normal game phase flag area.

In step S22-4, a normal electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-5. In the normal electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the opening and closing of the normal electric role 53a is set.
A normal electric role control table corresponding to the execution status (executing or stopped) of the time-saving control is stored in the ROM 220. In addition, each normal electric role control table specifies the time before the normal electric role is opened, the effective time for closing the normal electric role, the waiting time for the end of the opening, the number of times of opening and closing, and the control data (solenoid control data, control time data) of the normal electric role solenoid 64 corresponding to each opening and closing switch.
In the normal electric control data setting process, a normal electric control table corresponding to the execution status (ongoing or stopped) of the time-saving control is read out, and the read normal electric control table is set in the normal electric control table area of RAM 230.
Next, the number of times of switching is read by referring to the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the number of times of switching is read and set in the normal electric role switching number counter. Also, the value of the normal electric role winning number counter is set to "0".

In step S22-5, a normal electric role release time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S22-6. In the normal electric role release time setting process, a normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined normal electric role release time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S22-6, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S55-2).
In the normal game phase update process, first, a value corresponding to the "normal electric device pre-opening state" is set in the winning normal game phase flag area.
Also, in the normal game phase flag area, a value corresponding to the "waiting for normal game change state" is set.

(Pre-processing for opening normal electric devices)
Next, the normal electric accessory opening pre-processing executed in step S55-2 will be described.
Figure 46 is a flowchart showing the processing before opening normal electric parts.
When the normal electric feature opening pre-processing is executed in step S55-2, the process first proceeds to step S23-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S23-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S23-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S23-2, a normal electric utility opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S23-3. The normal electric utility opening/closing switching process will be described later.
In step S23-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric device release control state" is set in the normal game phase flag area when a win occurs.

(Normal electric feature release control process)
Next, the normal electric feature release control process executed in step S55-2 will be described.
Figure 47 is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature release control process.
When the normal electric feature release control process is executed in step S55-2, as shown in FIG. 47, it first proceeds to step S25-1.
In step S25-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-4.
In step S25-2, it is determined whether the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S25-3. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching counter is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5.
In step S25-3, a normal electric utility opening/closing switching process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-4. The normal electric utility opening/closing switching process will be described later.
In step S25-4, it is determined whether the value of the ordinary electric winning count counter has reached a predetermined upper limit value (in this embodiment, 3 [balls]), and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric winning count counter has reached the predetermined upper limit value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S25-5, and if it is determined that the value of the ordinary electric winning count counter has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).

In step S25-5, a normal electric component opening control end process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-6. In the normal electric component opening control end process, solenoid control data specifying the de-energization is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. As a result, the normal electric component 53a is controlled to the closed state.
In step S25-6, a normal electric role closing effective time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S25-7. In the normal electric role closing effective time setting process, a normal electric role closing effective time is set in the normal game timer by referring to the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230.
In step S25-7, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric device closing enabled state" is set in the normal game phase flag area when a win occurs.

(Normal electric service opening and closing switching process)
Next, the normal electric utility opening and closing switching process of steps S23-2 and S25-3 will be described.
FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the normal electric service opening and closing switching process.
When the normal electric utility opening and closing switching process is executed in steps S23-2 and S25-3, as shown in FIG. 48, first, the process proceeds to step S24-1.
In step S24-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching count counter is "0" or not. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching count counter is not "0" (No), the process proceeds to step S24-2. If it is determined that the value of the normal electric service opening and closing switching count counter is "0" (Yes), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S23-3, S25-4).
In step S24-2, a normal electric role control data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-3. In the normal electric role control data setting process, control data for controlling the normal electric role 53a to an open state or a closed state is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric role control data setting process, the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced to read out solenoid control data corresponding to the value of the normal electric role open/close switching count counter. Then, the read out solenoid control data (control data specifying whether to energize or stop energizing) is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 230. This starts the control of the normal electric role solenoid 64 based on the set solenoid data, and the normal electric role 53a is controlled to be in an open or closed state.

In step S24-3, a normal electric control time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S24-4. In the normal electric control time setting process, a control time for continuing the control based on the solenoid control data set in step S24-2 is set.
Specifically, in the normal electric role control time setting process, the control time corresponding to the value of the normal electric role open/close switching count counter is read out by referring to the normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230. Then, the read control time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S24-4, a normal electric service opening/closing switching counter update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (steps S23-3, S25-4). In the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter update process, "1" is subtracted from the value set in the normal electric service opening/closing switching counter.

(Normal electric device closure effective processing)
Next, the normal electric feature closure validity process executed in step S55-2 will be described.
Figure 49 is a flowchart showing the normal electric feature closure activation process.
When the normal electric feature closure activation process is executed in step S55-2, as shown in FIG. 49, the process first proceeds to step S26-1.
In step S26-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S26-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S26-2, the open end wait time setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S26-3. In the open end wait time setting process, a normal electric role control table set in the normal electric role control table area of the RAM 230 is referenced, and a predetermined open end wait time is set in the normal game timer.
In step S26-3, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric device release end wait state" is set in the normal game phase flag area when a win occurs.

(Normal electric device release end wait processing)
Next, the normal electric accessory release end wait process executed in step S55-2 will be described.
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the waiting process for the end of the normal electric device opening.
When the normal electric role release end wait process is executed in step S55-2, as shown in FIG. 50, the process first proceeds to step S27-1.
In step S27-1, it is determined whether the value of the normal game timer is "0" or not, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to step S27-2, and if it is determined that the value of the normal game timer is not "0" (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In step S27-2, a normal game phase update process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-15).
In the normal game phase update process, a value corresponding to the "normal electric device non-operating state" is set in the normal game phase flag area when a win occurs.

(Performance display device control process)
Next, the performance display device control process in step S4-25 will be described.
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the performance display device control process.
The performance display device control process is based on a program for controlling the display of the performance display device 206. In other words, the performance display device control process is based on a program stored in the unused area m2 (program area) of the ROM 220. The performance display device control process is called during execution of the timer interrupt process.
When the performance display device control process is called in step S4-25, the process proceeds to step S38-1, as shown in FIG.
In step S38-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-2. In the register save process, the values of all registers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM. In addition, the values of all stack pointers used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1 are saved to a save area in RAM.

In step S38-2, it is determined whether a playable state has occurred (set) or not, and if it is determined that a playable state has occurred (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-3, and if it is determined that a playable state has not occurred (No), the process proceeds to step S38-11.
Here, it is determined whether or not a playable state has occurred based on the value (game machine state flag) stored in the game machine state flag area of the RAM 230. At this time, if the value stored in the game machine state flag area is a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has occurred, and if the value is not a value corresponding to the playable state, it is determined that the playable state has not occurred.
In step S38-3, a total-out counter increment process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-4.
In the total count counter increment process, it is determined whether or not the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the total out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the total out counter is not incremented.

In step S38-4, it is determined whether or not a predetermined gaming state is being reached, and if it is determined that the predetermined gaming state is being reached (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-5, and if it is determined that the predetermined gaming state is not being reached (No), the process proceeds to step S38-7.
Here, the "predetermined gaming state" is a gaming state in which a "special chart low probability state" has occurred, the time-saving control is stopped, and a jackpot gaming state has not occurred.
In step S38-5, a normal out counter increment process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-6.
In the normal out counter increment process, it is determined whether or not the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has been detected, "1" is added to the value of the normal out counter. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the out switch 109 has not been detected, the value of the normal out counter is not incremented.

In step S38-6, normal prize ball counter addition processing is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S38-7.
In the normal prize ball counter addition process, first, it is determined whether or not the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is added with "4", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of a game ball into the first start port 51. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the special figure 1 start port switch 101 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether the on state of the first special figure 2 start port switch 102a is detected. If it is determined that the on state of the first special figure 2 start port switch 102a is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is added by "4", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of the game ball into the second start port 52. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the first special figure 2 start port switch 102a is not detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.
Next, it is determined whether the ON state of the second special figure 2 start port switch 102b is detected. If it is determined that the ON state of the second special figure 2 start port switch 102b is detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is added with "1", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of the game ball into the third start port 53. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ON state of the second special figure 2 start port switch 102b is not detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not added.

Next, it is determined whether or not the on state of the right winning opening switch 105 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the right winning opening switch 105 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is incremented by "1", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of a game ball into the right other winning opening 56. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the right winning opening switch 105 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not incremented.
Next, it is determined whether or not the on state of the left winning opening switch 106 has been detected. If it is determined that the on state of the left winning opening switch 106 has been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is incremented by "4", which is the number of prize balls paid out in response to the entry of game balls into the left other winning openings 57a to 57c. On the other hand, if it is determined that the on state of the left winning opening switch 106 has not been detected, the value of the normal prize ball counter is not incremented.

In step S38-7, it is determined whether the value of the total out counter has reached a reference value, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has reached the reference value (Yes), the process proceeds to step S38-8, and if it is determined that the value of the total out counter has not reached the reference value (No), the process proceeds to step S38-9.
In this embodiment, the reference value is 60000×n (n=integer), where “n” is a value indicating the current interval, and is initially set to “1”.
In step S38-8, a section update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-9. In the section update process, the section is updated.
In the section update process, first, the base ratio stored in base value buffer 1 of RAM 230 is shifted (moved) to base value buffer 2 of RAM 230 .
Next, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the normal out counter. Also, a predetermined initial value (in this embodiment, "0") is set as the value of the normal prize ball counter.
Next, "1" is added to the value (n) indicating the current interval, thereby updating the reference value.

In step S38-9, a base ratio calculation process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-10. In the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated.
Specifically, in the base ratio calculation process, a base ratio is calculated based on the value of the normal out counter and the value of the normal winning ball counter. The calculated base ratio is then stored in the base value buffer 1 of the RAM 230.
Here, the base ratio is the ratio of the value of the normal prize ball counter to the value of the normal out counter.

In step S38-10, a base ratio display data setting process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-11. In the base ratio display data setting process, display data to be output to the performance display device 206 is set.
The RAM 230 includes a discrimination segment output request buffer (16 bits) and a ratio segment output request buffer (16 bits).
In the base ratio display data setting process, first, it is selected which base ratio is to be displayed, the base ratio for the current section or the base ratio for the previous section.
Then, when the display of the base ratio of the current section is selected, information indicating that this is the base ratio of the current section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the current section is set in the ratio segment output request buffer.

Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and display data corresponding to the ones digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 1 is set to the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "b," LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "b," LEDs 49 to 56 display a number indicating the tens digit of the current base ratio, and LEDs 57 to 64 display a number indicating the units digit of the current base ratio.

On the other hand, if the display of the base ratio of the previous section is selected, information indicating that this is the base ratio of the previous section is set in the identification segment output request buffer, and information indicating the base ratio of the previous section is set in the ratio segment output request buffer.
Specifically, the display data (8 bits) of "b" is set to the upper 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, the display data (8 bits) of "c" is set to the lower 8 bits of the identification segment output request buffer, display data corresponding to the tens digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the upper 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer, and display data corresponding to the ones digit of the base ratio stored in the base value buffer 2 is set to the lower 8 bits of the ratio segment output request buffer.
As a result, of the light-emitting elements that make up the performance display device 206, LEDs 33 to 40 display the letter "b," LEDs 41 to 48 display the letter "c," LEDs 49 to 56 display a number indicating the tens digit of the current base ratio, and LEDs 57 to 64 display a number indicating the units digit of the current base ratio.

In step S38-11, a register restoration process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S38-12. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S38-1 (the register values used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) and the stack pointer value saved in step S38-1 (the stack pointer value used during execution of the process based on the program stored in the use area m1) are restored.
In step S38-12, an interrupt permission process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S4-26). In the interrupt permission process, the interrupt prohibition state is released. This allows the execution of a power-off save process, a timer interrupt process, and the like.

(Various Effects Executed in Pachinko Machine 1)
Next, various effects executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.

(Hold performance)
First, the hold effect (hold display) executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
In the pachinko machine 1, a hold performance is executed for each piece of game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) stored in the game information storage area (special chart 1 game information storage area and special chart 2 game information storage area).
The hold effect is an effect that suggests (notifies) that the notification display (start determination) of a special pattern based on the game information that is the subject of the hold effect (hereinafter referred to as ``hold effect subject game information'') is on hold, or that the notification display (changing display or stopped display) of a special pattern based on the hold effect subject game information is currently being executed.
In the reserved effect, a reserved pattern h corresponding to the reserved effect target game information is displayed in the reserved pattern display areas b1 and b2.

Specifically, in the reserved pattern display area b1, display positions (display sections) at which the reserved pattern h is displayed are specified which correspond to each of the five memory areas (memory area 0 to memory area 4) of the special pattern 1 game information memory area.
In addition, in the reserved pattern display area b2, display positions (display sections) where the reserved pattern h is displayed are specified which correspond to each of the five memory areas (memory area 0 to memory area 4) of the special pattern 2 game information memory area.
In a reserved performance in which the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information) is the reserved performance target game information, a reserved pattern h corresponding to the reserved performance target game information is displayed in the reserved pattern display area b1.
In other words, during the period when the game information for the reserved performance is stored in each memory area (memory area 0 to memory area 4), the reserved pattern h corresponding to the reserved performance target game information is displayed in the reserved pattern display area b1 at a position corresponding to that memory area.
As a result, in the reserved pattern display area b1, at positions corresponding to each of memory areas 1 to 4, a reserved pattern h corresponding to the special pattern 1 game information in which the notification display of the special pattern (start determination) is pending is displayed, and at a position corresponding to memory area 0, a reserved pattern h corresponding to the special pattern 1 game information in which the notification display of the special pattern (changing display or stopped display) is currently being executed is displayed.
On the other hand, in a reserved performance in which the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information) is the reserved performance target game information, a reserved pattern h corresponding to the reserved performance target game information is displayed in the reserved pattern display area b2.
In other words, during the period when the game information for the reserved performance is stored in each memory area (memory area 0 to memory area 4), the reserved pattern h corresponding to the reserved performance target game information is displayed in the reserved pattern display area b2 at a position corresponding to that memory area.
As a result, in the reserved pattern display area b2, at positions corresponding to each of memory areas 1 to 4, a reserved pattern h corresponding to the special pattern 2 game information in which the notification display of a special pattern (start determination) is pending is displayed, and at a position corresponding to memory area 0, a reserved pattern h corresponding to the special pattern 2 game information in which the notification display of a special pattern (changing display or stopped display) is currently being executed is displayed.

For example, the various random numbers acquired in step S9-3 are stored as special chart 1 game information in memory area 3 of the special chart 1 game information storage area, and when a pending performance targeting the special chart 1 game information is executed, a pending pattern h corresponding to the pending performance target game information is displayed in a position corresponding to the memory area 3 in the pending pattern display area b1 in response to the start of the pending performance.
Thereafter, in response to a shift of the memory area storing the game information subject to the reserved performance from the memory area 3 to the memory area 2, the display position of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the game information subject to the reserved performance is shifted from the position corresponding to the memory area 3 to the position corresponding to the memory area 2.
In addition, in response to the shifting of the memory area for storing the game information subject to the reserved performance from memory area 2 to memory area 1, the display position of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the game information subject to the reserved performance is shifted from the position corresponding to memory area 2 to the position corresponding to memory area 1.
Furthermore, in response to the memory area storing the game information subject to pending performance being shifted from memory area 1 to memory area 0, the display position of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the game information subject to pending performance is shifted from the position corresponding to memory area 1 to the position corresponding to memory area 0.
Then, in response to the end of the stop display of the special symbol based on the reserved performance target game information, the display of the reserved symbol h corresponding to the reserved performance target game information in the reserved symbol display area b1 (the position corresponding to the memory area 0) is ended. This ends the reserved performance.

In this embodiment, the types of hold effects are defined as normal hold effects and hold notice effects.
The "normal hold effect" is a type of hold effect that does not suggest the result of a pre-determination (step S9-8) based on the game information for the hold effect.
In this embodiment, normal hold and special hold are defined as the types (modes) of the reserved pattern h.
In the normal hold effect, a normal hold is displayed as a hold pattern h corresponding to the game information subject to the hold effect.
A normal hold effect is started when the game information for the hold effect target (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) is stored in the game information memory area (special chart 1 game information memory area or special chart 2 game information memory area), and is ended when the stopped display of the special pattern based on the game information for the hold effect ends.

(Pre-order announcement)
The "reserved notice effect" is a type of pre-reading notice effect. In other words, the reserved notice effect is a type of reserved effect that suggests the result of the advance judgment (step S9-8) based on the predetermined game information by the state (display state) of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the game information.
In the following description, the game information that is the target of the reserved advance notice performance is referred to as "pre-notification target game information." Also, the reserved symbol h that corresponds to the pre-notification target game information is referred to as "pre-notification target reserved symbol hy."
The pending notice effect is an effect that suggests the result of a preliminary special pattern determination based on the game information to be notified (specifically, the possibility that it is a "jackpot pattern").
In addition, the pending notice performance may be configured to suggest the result of a preliminary special chart change pattern determination based on the game information to be notified (specifically, the possibility of a "super reach change").
In the hold preview performance, a special hold is displayed as the preview target hold pattern hy.
In this embodiment, the following special hold modes (types) are defined: "blue hold,""greenhold,""purplehold," and "red hold."
In the hold preview performance, the state of the preview target hold pattern hy changes, and the state of the preview target hold pattern hy that is finally displayed suggests the result of the advance judgment based on the preview target game information (specifically, the possibility that a jackpot game state will occur).
Here, the expectation level for each type of special reserve is specified as follows, in order of highest expectation of jackpot, as follows: "red reserve,""purplereserve,""greenreserve," and "blue reserve" (high expectation of jackpot → low expectation of jackpot).

When the reserved notice performance is executed, one or more reserved change triggers and reserved change contents corresponding to each reserved change trigger are set. Then, in the reserved notice performance, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified changes according to the reserved change contents corresponding to the reserved change trigger in response to the arrival of each reserved change trigger.
The "reserved change trigger" is a trigger for changing the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified. Also, the "reserved change content" is a content for changing the state of the reserved pattern hy to be notified.
In this embodiment, the hold change trigger is defined as the start of a change performance corresponding to each advance hold information, the start of a change performance corresponding to the advance notice target game information, etc. Then, when the hold notice performance is executed, one or more hold change triggers are set from among these hold change triggers.
In this embodiment, the hold notice performance is executed only for the special chart 2 game information out of the special chart 1 game information and the special chart 2 game information.

(Variable effects)
Next, each aspect of the variable presentation executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be explained.
As described above, on the display screen 31a, it is possible to configure a performance pattern display area A in which performance patterns z1, z2 corresponding to the first special pattern are displayed, and a performance pattern display area B in which performance patterns z1, z2 corresponding to the second special pattern are displayed.
In addition, each of the performance pattern display areas A and B is composed of three first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 in which the first performance pattern z1 is displayed, and one second performance pattern display area a4 in which the second performance pattern z2 is displayed.
In the following explanation, in each performance pattern display area A, B, the first performance pattern z1 displayed in the first performance pattern display area a1 will be referred to as the "left pattern", the first performance pattern z1 displayed in the first performance pattern display area a2 will be referred to as the "middle pattern", and the first performance pattern z1 displayed in the first performance pattern display area a3 will be referred to as the "right pattern".
In addition, in the second performance pattern display area a4 of each performance pattern display area A, B, the second performance pattern z2 is constantly displayed in a changing state while the changing performance (first half changing performance and second half changing performance) is being executed.

First, each aspect of the first half variable presentation will be explained.
In this embodiment, the fluctuation mode numbers (types of fluctuation modes) are defined as a fluctuation mode number corresponding to "fluctuation without pseudo consecutive hits", a fluctuation mode number corresponding to "pseudo consecutive hit 2 fluctuation", and a fluctuation mode number corresponding to "pseudo consecutive hit 3 fluctuation".
In addition, as the types (variation performance numbers) of the first half variation performance, a "variation performance without pseudo consecutive hits", a "pseudo consecutive hit 2 variation performance", and a "pseudo consecutive hit 3 variation performance" are specified.
And, when the fluctuation mode number corresponding to "fluctuation without pseudo consecutive hits" is specified by the fluctuation mode specification command, "fluctuation without pseudo consecutive hits" is selected as the mode of the first half fluctuation performance. On the other hand, when the fluctuation mode number corresponding to "fluctuation with pseudo consecutive hits 2" is specified by the fluctuation mode specification command, "fluctuation with pseudo consecutive hits 2" is selected as the mode of the first half fluctuation performance.
On the other hand, when the fluctuation mode number corresponding to the "pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation" is specified by the fluctuation mode designation command, the "pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation presentation" is selected as the mode of the first half fluctuation presentation.
Here, the "pseudo no consecutive change effect", "pseudo consecutive 2 change effect" and "pseudo consecutive 3 change effect" can be executed regardless of the game state ("game state A" to "game state D").

The "pseudo non-consecutive fluctuation performance" is composed of normal fluctuation performance.
The "normal variation effect" refers to a display effect in which the first effect pattern z1 is normally displayed in the three first effect pattern display areas a1 to a3. Specifically, in the normal variation effect, the left pattern, the center pattern, and the right pattern are normally displayed in a variable manner.
The "normal variable display" refers to a display in which the type of the first performance pattern z1 displayed at the lottery result display position of the first performance pattern display areas a1 to a3 is changed sequentially.
The "lottery result display position" refers to the position where the first performance pattern z1 is displayed in a stopped performance described below.
In the "pseudo non-consecutive variation performance", the "normal variation performance" starts according to its start. In the "pseudo non-consecutive variation performance", the normal variation display of the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern ("normal variation performance") continues until the end of the "pseudo non-consecutive variation performance".
In addition, in the "pseudo non-consecutive fluctuation performance", the pseudo-fluctuation performance described below is not executed.
The "pseudo continuous variation performance"("pseudo continuous 2 variation performance" and "pseudo continuous 3 variation performance") is a performance in which the variation display of the first performance pattern z1 is executed multiple times in a simulated manner during the execution of one variation display of the special pattern. Specifically, the pseudo continuous variation performance is configured to include multiple pseudo variation performances.
The "pseudo consecutive 2 fluctuation performance" is configured to include two pseudo fluctuation performances. The "pseudo consecutive 3 fluctuation performance" is configured to include three pseudo fluctuation performances.
In the following description, the final pseudo-fluctuation performance of the pseudo-continuous fluctuation performance is referred to as the "final pseudo-fluctuation performance." In addition, the pseudo-fluctuation performance of each pseudo-fluctuation performance, except for the final pseudo-fluctuation performance, is referred to as the "middle pseudo-fluctuation performance."

Each pseudo-fluctuation effect (mid-round pseudo-fluctuation effect and final pseudo-fluctuation effect) is composed of a normal fluctuation effect, a normal reach fluctuation effect, and a pseudo consecutive effect.
The "normal reach variation effect" refers to a display effect in which the first effect pattern z1 is displayed temporarily stopped in two or more of the three first effect pattern display areas a1 to a3, and the combination of the first effect patterns z1 displayed temporarily stopped in two or more areas is a combination included in the "jackpot pattern."
In the following explanation, in a normal reach change presentation (or a reduced reach change presentation described later), the first presentation pattern z1 that is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination included in a "jackpot pattern" is referred to as the "first presentation pattern z1 that forms a reach state."
Specifically, in the normal reach-changing performance, the reach state is formed by the left and right symbols. That is, in the normal reach-changing performance, the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the temporarily stopped left and right symbols are of the same type. In addition, in the normal reach-changing performance, the normal change display is continued for the middle symbol.
A "temporary stop display" refers to a display in which one type of first performance pattern z1 moves (swings, rotates, etc.) in a predetermined manner and remains there for a predetermined period of time at the lottery result display position of the first performance pattern display area a1 to a3.

The "pseudo consecutive performance" is a performance that teases whether or not the next pseudo-variable performance will be executed.
The "pseudo consecutive performance" is a type of pseudo consecutive performance that indicates (indicates) whether or not the next pseudo variable performance will be executed, depending on whether or not the pseudo consecutive continuation pattern is displayed temporarily stopped.
The "pseudo consecutive continuation pattern" is composed of information encouraging the execution of the next pseudo-variable performance (in this embodiment, the word "NEXT").
In this embodiment, the "pseudo consecutive winning performance" is defined as a "pseudo consecutive winning continuation performance" and a "pseudo consecutive winning end performance".
The "pseudo-consecutive continuation effect" is an effect that suggests that the next pseudo-variation effect will be executed after teasing whether or not the next pseudo-variation effect will be executed.
Specifically, in the "pseudo consecutive continuation performance", a pseudo consecutive continuation pattern (middle pattern) appears as a middle pattern, and the pseudo consecutive continuation pattern moves toward the lottery result display position. At this time, the moving speed (changing speed) of the pseudo consecutive continuation pattern is slower than the moving speed of the first performance pattern z1 in the normal changing display. Then, in the "pseudo consecutive continuation performance", the pseudo consecutive continuation pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. This suggests that the next pseudo changing performance will be executed.
The "pseudo consecutive end effect" is an effect that teases whether or not the next pseudo-variation effect will be executed, and then suggests that the next pseudo-variation effect will not be executed.
Specifically, in the "pseudo consecutive consecutive end performance", as in the pseudo consecutive consecutive continuation performance, a pseudo consecutive consecutive continuation pattern (middle pattern) appears as a middle pattern, and the pseudo consecutive consecutive continuation pattern moves toward the lottery result display position. At this time, the moving speed of the pseudo consecutive consecutive continuation pattern is slower than the moving speed of the first performance pattern z1 in the normal variable display. And, in the "pseudo consecutive consecutive end performance", the pseudo consecutive consecutive continuation pattern passes the lottery result display position without being displayed as a temporary stop. This suggests that the next pseudo variable performance will not be executed.

In each pseudo-variable performance, the normal variation performance is performed according to the start of the performance, and then the reach variation performance is performed. That is, after the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed in the normal variation, the left and right symbols are displayed temporarily stopped, and the reach state is formed by the right and left symbols. Then, during the reach variation performance (while the reach state is being formed), the pseudo-continuation performance is performed.
Each pseudo-variation performance during the middle of each round is ended in response to the end of the pseudo-continuous continuous performance. Then, in response to the end of the pseudo-variation performance during the middle of each round, the next pseudo-variation performance is started.
In the final pseudo-variation performance of each round, the normal variation performance is executed according to the start of the performance, and then the reach variation performance is executed. That is, after the left, middle, and right symbols are displayed normally, the left and right symbols are temporarily stopped and the reach state is formed by the right and left symbols. Then, during the reach variation performance (during the formation of the reach state), the pseudo-consecutive end performance is executed.
The final pseudo-variation performance of each round is ended according to the end of the pseudo-consecutive end performance. Then, according to the end of the final pseudo-variation performance, the latter half variation performance (normal reach variation performance or super reach variation performance) starts.

Next, each aspect of the second half variable presentation will be explained.
In this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern numbers (types of fluctuation patterns) are defined as a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to a "no-reach fluctuation", a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to a "normal reach fluctuation", and a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to a "super reach fluctuation".
In addition, the modes (variation performance numbers) of the latter half variation performance are specified as "non-reach variation performance", "normal reach variation performance", and "super reach variation performance".
And when the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "non-reach fluctuation" is specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command, "non-reach fluctuation" is selected as the mode of the latter half fluctuation performance. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "normal reach fluctuation" is specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command, "normal reach fluctuation" is selected as the mode of the latter half fluctuation performance. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to "super reach fluctuation" is specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command, "super reach fluctuation" is selected as the mode of the latter half fluctuation performance.
Here, the "no-reach fluctuation effect", "normal reach fluctuation effect" and "super reach fluctuation effect" can be executed regardless of the game state ("game state A" to "game state D").

The "non-reach variable performance" is composed of a normal variable performance as a display performance.
Specifically, in the "non-reach variation performance", the "normal variation performance" is executed in response to the start of the "reach non-variation performance". That is, the normal variation display of the left, middle and right symbols is started.
In the "no reach variation performance", the normal variation display of the left pattern, the middle pattern, and the right pattern ("normal variation performance") continues until the end of the "no reach variation performance". Then, in response to the end of the "no reach variation performance", a stop performance starts.
In addition, in the no-reach variation performance, the reach variation performance and the developed reach performance described below are not executed.
The "normal reach fluctuation performance" is composed of normal reach fluctuation performances.
Specifically, in the "normal reach variation performance", a normal reach variation performance is executed in response to its start. That is, the left and right symbols form a reach state. The normal reach variation performance ends in response to the passage of a predetermined time from its start.
The "normal reach fluctuation performance" ends when the normal reach fluctuation performance ends. Then, when the "normal reach fluctuation performance" ends, a stop performance starts.
In addition, in the normal reach variation presentation, the developed reach presentation described below is not executed.

The "super reach variation effect" is composed of display effects including a normal reach variation effect, a reduced reach variation effect, and an advanced reach effect.
The "reduced reach variation performance" refers to a display performance in which the first performance pattern z1 that forms the reach state is displayed in a reduced state (temporarily stopped display). In particular, in the reduced reach variation performance, only the first performance pattern z1 that forms the reach state is displayed, and the display of the first performance pattern z1 that does not form the reach state is omitted. Specifically, in the reduced reach variation display, the right and left patterns that form the reach state are displayed in a reduced state and temporarily stopped, and the center pattern is not displayed.
The "development reach effect" is an effect that encourages the "big win symbol" to be stopped and displayed in the effect symbol display areas a1 to a4. The development reach effect is executed during the reach variation effect.

In the "super reach variation performance", upon start of the performance, a normal reach variation performance is executed, and then a reduced reach variation performance is executed.
That is, from the state where the left and right symbols form a reach state, the left and right symbols forming the reach state are reduced, the reduced left symbol is moved to the upper left edge of the display screen 31a, the reduced right symbol is moved to the upper right edge of the display screen 31a, and the display of the center symbol disappears. At this time, the reach state is formed by the left and right symbols stopped and displayed in the stop performance related to the predetermined stop performance number.
In the "super reach variation performance", during the period in which the reduced reach variation performance is being executed, the "developed reach performance" is executed.
That is, the "developing reach effect" starts in response to the passage of a predetermined time from the start of the reduced reach variation effect. The "developing reach effect" ends in response to the passage of a predetermined time from the start of the "developing reach effect".
The "Super Reach Variation Presentation" ends when the "Development Reach Presentation" ends. Then, when the "Super Reach Variation Presentation" ends, a stop presentation starts.
In the "advanced reach effect", an effect image showing a battle between an ally character and an enemy character is displayed on the display screen 31a. In particular, the "advanced reach effect" includes a "reach judgment effect". The "reach judgment effect" is an effect that suggests the result of a special symbol lottery (special symbol hit judgment).
The "reach-judgement effect" is an effect in which the outcome of a battle between an ally character and an enemy character is judged (determined and determined). In this embodiment, a "victory effect" and a "defeat effect" are defined as types of "reach-judgement effect". In the "victory effect", an effect image is displayed on the display screen 31a showing that the ally character wins against the enemy character. On the other hand, in the "defeat effect", an effect image is displayed on the display screen 31a showing that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character.
Then, in the "developed reach performance", when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the performance, a "reach judgment performance" is executed. At this time, if the special symbol lottery is won (if the special symbol hit judgment judges that it is a "big hit" or a "small hit"), a "victory performance" is executed as the "reach judgment performance". On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery is lost (if the special symbol hit judgment judges that it is a "miss"), a "defeat performance" is executed as the "reach judgment performance".
As a result, in the "development reach effect", the result of the special pattern lottery is suggested depending on which "reach judgement effect" is executed, either the "victory effect" or the "defeat effect".

(Main preview performance)
Next, the main preview performance executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, a main notice performance is executed during execution of a variable performance.
The "main preview performance" is a performance executed during a variable performance, and is a performance that suggests the result of the start judgment related to the variable performance (special chart hit judgment, special chart pattern judgment, special chart variable pattern judgment, etc.).
In this embodiment, the main preview performance suggests the result of the special pattern determination (specifically, the possibility that it is a "jackpot pattern").
In this embodiment, multiple types of main preview performances, each with different performance content, are defined.

(Big hit performance)
Next, the big win presentation executed in the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
In the pachinko machine 1, a big win performance is executed during a big win game state.
The "jackpot effect" is an effect that is executed during a jackpot gaming state, and is an effect that suggests the type of win ("jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 5").
In this embodiment, a jackpot presentation corresponding to each winning type (each of "jackpot pattern 1" to "jackpot pattern 5") is defined.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "jackpot pattern 1" or the "jackpot pattern 2" is hit, the "jackpot judgment effect" is executed as a jackpot effect. The "jackpot judgment effect" is an effect that suggests the game state (special pattern low probability state (game state D) or special pattern high probability state (game state B)) that occurs after the jackpot game state ends. The "jackpot judgment effect" is executed during the ending period.
That is, as described above, when "jackpot pattern 1" and "jackpot pattern 2" are won, the stop patterns stopped and displayed in the performance pattern display area A are the same (specifically, "chance patterns"). Also, when "jackpot pattern 1" and "jackpot pattern 2" are won, the number of rounds played is the same (specifically, 6 times). As a result, when a player wins "jackpot pattern 1" or "jackpot pattern 2", the player cannot distinguish between the two based on the state of the stop patterns, the number of rounds played, etc.
Therefore, when "jackpot pattern 1" or "jackpot pattern 2" is selected, a "jackpot judgment effect" is executed as a jackpot performance, and the "jackpot judgment effect" is configured to suggest the game state that will occur after the jackpot game state ends.
That is, in the "judgment during jackpot performance", a performance image is displayed on the display screen 31a, in which an ally character attempts a specified mission (task). In particular, the "judgment during jackpot performance" is a performance in which the result of the ally character's mission challenge is judged (determined and confirmed). In this embodiment, the types of the "judgment during jackpot performance" are defined as a "success performance" and a "failure performance". In the "success performance", a performance image is displayed on the display screen 31a, in which the ally character's mission challenge is successful. On the other hand, in the "failure performance", a performance image is displayed on the display screen 31a, in which the ally character's mission challenge is unsuccessful.
If the "jackpot pattern 1" or the "jackpot pattern 2" is selected, the "jackpot judgment effect" is executed as the jackpot effect. In this case, if the "jackpot pattern 1" is selected, the "failure effect" is executed as the "jackpot judgment effect". On the other hand, if the "jackpot pattern 2" is selected, the "success effect" is executed as the "jackpot judgment effect".
This indicates the game state after the end of the jackpot game state depending on which "judgment effect during jackpot" is executed, either a "success effect" or a "failure effect."

(Processing executed on the performance control board 300)
Next, the processing executed by the CPU of the performance control board 300 will be described.
(CPU initialization process)
First, the CPU initialization process executed by the CPU of the performance control board 300 will be described.
A reset circuit (not shown) is provided on the performance control board 300. When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the reset circuit generates a reset signal.
The CPU of the performance control board 300 starts a CPU initialization process (not shown) in response to the generation of a reset signal by the reset circuit.
When the CPU initialization process starts, first, various registers, various timers (frame timer, phase timer, etc.), clock generation circuits, various RAMs, etc. are initialized. Next, a random number update process for performance is executed to update various random numbers for performance. After that, the random number update process for performance is executed repeatedly until various interrupt processes described later are executed.

(Command reception interrupt processing)
Next, the command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the performance control board 300 will be described.
The CPU of the performance control board 300 executes a command reception interrupt process (not shown) in response to receiving a control command from the main control board 200.
In the command reception interrupt processing, the control command received from the main control board 200 is stored in the reception buffer area of the RAM of the performance control board 300.

(Sub timer interrupt processing)
Next, the sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the performance control board 300 will be described.
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the sub timer interrupt process.
The performance control board 300 includes a clock generating circuit. The clock generating circuit generates a clock pulse signal at predetermined intervals.
The CPU of the performance control board 300 starts the sub timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 52 at predetermined intervals based on the generation of clock pulses by the clock generating circuit. When the sub timer interrupt process starts, the process first proceeds to step S31-1.
In step S31-1, a register save process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-2, in which the register values are saved to a save area in the RAM.
In step S31-2, a timer update process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-3. In the timer update process, various timers (frame timer, phase timer, reset timer, etc.) provided in the performance control board 300 are updated.
In step S31-3, a command analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-4. In the command analysis process, the control command stored in the receiving buffer of the RAM of the performance control board 300 is analyzed, and a process according to the received control command is executed. The command analysis process will be described later.

In step S31-4, a time schedule management process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S31-5. In the time schedule management process, the progress of each performance is managed.
Here, the ROM of the performance control board 300 stores a performance control table corresponding to each performance (each aspect of the variable performance, each aspect of the stop performance, each aspect of the preview performance, each aspect of the pre-reading preview performance, each aspect of the hold performance, etc.).
The "performance control table" contains information that defines the progress of performances (display performances, sound performances, lamp performances, movable object performances, etc.).
In each performance control table, multiple process data are registered in chronological order. Each process data includes one or more pieces of command information. Each piece of command information is a process for specifying the start of a specific performance (display performance, sound performance, lamp performance, or movable body performance). In particular, each piece of command information includes information for specifying the content of the performance to be started (display performance number, sound performance number, lamp performance number, or movable body performance number).

In the time schedule management process, the progress of a performance is managed based on the performance control table corresponding to each performance that is set in a specified area of the RAM of the performance control board 300 and the value of the performance management timer corresponding to that performance (a performance management timer that measures the elapsed time of that performance).
Specifically, for each performance, among the process data registered in the performance control table, processing is executed based on the process data corresponding to the current performance management timer value. As a result, the command information included in the process data is stored (stored) in a specified area of the RAM of the performance control board 300.
At this time, if the command information specifies the start of a display performance, display performance request information specifying the display performance number included in the command information is stored in a display performance request information storage area of the RAM of the performance control board 300.
On the other hand, if the command information specifies the start of a sound performance, sound performance request information specifying the sound performance number included in the command information is stored in a sound performance request information storage area of the RAM of the performance control board 300.
On the other hand, if the command information specifies the start of a lamp performance, lamp performance request information specifying the lamp performance number included in the command information is stored in a lamp performance request information storage area of the RAM of the performance control board 300.
On the other hand, when the command information specifies the start of a reel performance, reel performance request information specifying the reel performance number included in the command information is stored in a reel performance request information memory area of the RAM of the performance control board 300.
As a result of the above, processing based on each piece of process data is executed sequentially for all process data registered in the performance control table set in a specified area of the RAM of the performance control board 300.

In step S31-5, the register restoration process is executed, and the sub timer interrupt process is terminated. In the register restoration process, the register values saved in step S31-1 are restored.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the command analysis process in step S31-3 will be described.
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the command analysis process.
When the command analysis process is executed in step S31-3, the process proceeds to step S32-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S32-1, a setting value command receiving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-2.
In the setting value command reception process, it is determined whether or not a subcommand specifying a setting value has been received. If it is determined that a subcommand specifying a setting value has been received, the setting value specified by the subcommand is saved (stored) in a predetermined area of the RAM of the performance control board 300.

In step S32-2, a game status command receiving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-3.
In the game state command reception process, it is determined whether or not a game state designation command has been received. If it is determined that a game state designation command has been received, various effect flags are set.
In step S32-3, a hold command receiving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-4, which will be described later.
In step S32-4, a read-ahead command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-5, which will be described later.
In step S32-5, a variable command receiving process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-6, which will be described later.
In step S32-6, a stop command reception process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S32-7, which will be described later.
In step S32-7, an opening command reception process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4), which will be described later.

(Pending command reception process)
Next, the pending command receiving process in step S32-3 will be described.
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the pending command receiving process.
When the hold command receiving process is executed in step S32-3, the process proceeds to step S36-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S36-1, it is determined whether or not a hold number designation command has been received. If it is determined that a hold number designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-2. If it is determined that a hold number designation command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In step S36-2, it is determined whether the pending number specification command specifies an increase in the pending number (the pending number has increased by "1"), and if it is determined that the pending number specification command specifies an increase in the pending number (Yes), the process proceeds to step S36-3, and if it is determined that the pending number specification command does not specify an increase in the pending number (specifies that the pending number has decreased by "1") (No), the process proceeds to step S36-4.

In step S36-3, the reserved number addition process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the reserved number addition process, first, it is determined whether the reserved number designation command designates an increase in the reserved number of special chart 1.
Then, when it is determined that the reserved number designation command designates an increase in the reserved number of special chart 1, the value set in the reserved number counter of special chart 1 is added with "1" and set in the reserved number counter of special chart 1. Also, a normal reserved performance corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) game information of special chart 1 is set.
For this, the effect control table corresponding to the normal reserved effect is read, and the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved pattern h, a display position corresponding to the memory area (memory area 0 to memory area 4) in which the newly acquired special pattern 1 game information is stored is set among the five display positions included in the reserved pattern display area b1. Here, the memory area (memory area 0 to memory area 4) in which the newly acquired special pattern 1 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the special pattern 1 reserved number counter.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the reserved number designation command specifies an increase in the reserved number of special chart 2, the value set in the reserved number counter of special chart 2 plus "1" is set in the reserved number counter of special chart 2. In addition, a normal reserved performance corresponding to the newly acquired (stored) special chart 2 game information is set.
For this purpose, the effect control table corresponding to the normal reserved effect is read, and the read effect control table is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. At this time, as a display area for displaying the reserved pattern h, a display position corresponding to the memory area (memory area 0 to memory area 4) in which the newly acquired special pattern 2 game information is stored is set among the five display positions included in the reserved pattern display area b2. Here, the memory area (memory area 0 to memory area 4) in which the newly acquired special pattern 2 game information is stored is determined based on the value of the special pattern 2 reserved number counter.

In step S36-4, a pending number subtraction process is executed, the series of processes is terminated, and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-4).
In the reserved number subtraction process, first, it is determined whether the reserved number specification command specifies subtraction of the reserved number of special chart 1.
Then, when it is determined that the reserved number designation command designates the subtraction of the reserved number of special chart 1, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the reserved number counter of special chart 1 is newly set in the reserved number counter of special chart 1. Also, the display position of each reserved pattern h displayed in the reserved pattern display area b1 is shifted (moved).
Specifically, the reserved effect corresponding to the reserved pattern h displayed in the reserved pattern display area b1 at the position corresponding to the memory area 0 is terminated. This terminates the display of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the terminated reserved effect.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a position corresponding to memory area 1 in the reserved pattern display area b1, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the position corresponding to memory area 1 to the position corresponding to memory area 0.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a position corresponding to the memory area 2 in the reserved pattern display area b1, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the position corresponding to the memory area 2 to the position corresponding to the memory area 1.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a position corresponding to the memory area 3 in the reserved pattern display area b1, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the position corresponding to the memory area 3 to the position corresponding to the memory area 2.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a position corresponding to the memory area 4 in the reserved pattern display area b1, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the position corresponding to the memory area 4 to the position corresponding to the memory area 3.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the reserved number designation command designates the subtraction of the reserved number of special figures 2, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the value set in the reserved number counter of special figures 2 is newly set in the reserved number counter of special figures 2. Also, the display position of each reserved pattern h displayed in the reserved pattern display area b2 is changed (shifted).
Specifically, the reserved effect corresponding to the reserved pattern h displayed in the reserved pattern display area b2 at the position corresponding to the memory area 0 is ended. This ends the display of the reserved pattern h corresponding to the ended reserved effect.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a position corresponding to memory area 1 in the reserved pattern display area b2, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the position corresponding to memory area 1 to the position corresponding to memory area 0.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a position corresponding to memory area 2 in the reserved pattern display area b2, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the position corresponding to memory area 2 to the position corresponding to memory area 1.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a position corresponding to the memory area 3 in the reserved pattern display area b2, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the position corresponding to the memory area 3 to the position corresponding to the memory area 2.
In addition, when the reserved pattern h is displayed at a position corresponding to the memory area 4 in the reserved pattern display area b2, the display position of the reserved pattern h is shifted from the position corresponding to the memory area 4 to the position corresponding to the memory area 3.

(Read-ahead command reception processing)
Next, the read-ahead command reception process in step S32-4 will be described.
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the read-ahead command reception process.
When the read-ahead command reception process is executed in step S32-4, the process proceeds to step S33-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S33-1, it is determined whether or not a read-ahead designation command (first read-ahead designation command, second read-ahead designation command, and third read-ahead designation command) has been received, and if it is determined that a read-ahead designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-2, and if it is determined that a read-ahead designation command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).

In step S33-2, a look-ahead information analysis process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-3. In the look-ahead information analysis process, the information designated by the look-ahead designation command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the performance control board 300 as reserved information.
The RAM of the performance control board 300 is configured to include a special chart 1 reserved information memory area in which special chart 1 reserved information is stored, and a special chart 2 reserved information memory area in which special chart 2 reserved information is stored.
The special chart 1 reserved information storage area is configured to include storage areas 0 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing special chart 1 reserved information. The special chart 1 reserved information storage area stores special chart 1 reserved information corresponding to the special chart 1 game information stored in the special chart 1 game information storage area.
That is, the special chart 1 reserved information stored in the storage area 0 of the special chart 1 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 1 game information stored in the storage area 0 of the special chart 1 game information storage area. The special chart 1 reserved information stored in the storage area 1 of the special chart 1 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 1 game information stored in the storage area 1 of the special chart 1 game information storage area. Also, the special chart 1 reserved information stored in the storage area 2 of the special chart 1 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 1 game information stored in the storage area 2 of the special chart 1 game information storage area. Also, the special chart 1 reserved information stored in the storage area 3 of the special chart 1 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 1 game information stored in the storage area 3 of the special chart 1 game information storage area. Also, the special chart 1 reserved information stored in the storage area 4 of the special chart 1 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 1 game information stored in the storage area 4 of the special chart 1 game information storage area.

The special chart 2 reserved information storage area is configured to include storage areas 0 to 4 as storage areas capable of storing special chart 2 reserved information. The special chart 2 reserved information storage area stores special chart 2 reserved information corresponding to the special chart 2 game information stored in the special chart 2 game information storage area.
That is, the special chart 2 reserved information stored in the storage area 0 of the special chart 2 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 2 game information stored in the storage area 0 of the special chart 2 game information storage area. The special chart 2 reserved information stored in the storage area 1 of the special chart 2 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 2 game information stored in the storage area 1 of the special chart 2 game information storage area. Also, the special chart 2 reserved information stored in the storage area 2 of the special chart 2 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 2 game information stored in the storage area 2 of the special chart 2 game information storage area. Also, the special chart 2 reserved information stored in the storage area 3 of the special chart 2 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 2 game information stored in the storage area 3 of the special chart 2 game information storage area. Also, the special chart 2 reserved information stored in the storage area 4 of the special chart 2 reserved information storage area corresponds to the special chart 2 game information stored in the storage area 4 of the special chart 2 game information storage area.
Each reserved information (special chart 1 reserved information or special chart 2 reserved information) includes pattern information indicating the type of stopping pattern, first variable information indicating the content of the variable mode ("variable mode number" or "indefinite value"), and second variable information indicating the content of the variable pattern ("variable pattern number" or "indefinite value").

In the look-ahead information analysis process, first, it is determined whether or not the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery.
Then, when it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the first special symbol lottery, the type of the stop symbol designated by the first look-ahead designation command ("miss symbol", "big win symbol 1" to "big win symbol 5" or "small win symbol 1"), the content of the fluctuation mode designated by the second look-ahead designation command ("fluctuation mode number" or "indefinite value"), and the content of the fluctuation pattern designated by the third look-ahead designation command ("fluctuation pattern number" or "indefinite value") are analyzed, and special symbol 1 reserved information including the symbol information corresponding to the analyzed type of the stop symbol, the first fluctuation information corresponding to the analyzed content of the fluctuation mode, and the second fluctuation information corresponding to the analyzed content of the fluctuation pattern is generated. Then, the generated special symbol 1 reserved information is stored (saved) in the special symbol 1 reserved information storage area.
At this time, the priority of each storage area of the special drawing 1 reserved information storage area is specified to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, storage area 4 (highest to lowest) in order of priority. The generated special drawing 1 reserved information is stored in an empty storage area (the storage area with the highest priority among the empty storage areas) among storage areas 1 to 4.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the received first look-ahead designation command corresponds to the second special symbol lottery, the type of the stop symbol designated by the first look-ahead designation command ("miss symbol", "big win symbol 3", "big win symbol 4" or "small win symbol 1"), the content of the fluctuation mode designated by the second look-ahead designation command ("fluctuation mode number" or "indefinite value"), and the content of the fluctuation pattern designated by the third look-ahead designation command ("fluctuation pattern number" or "indefinite value") are analyzed, and special symbol 2 reserved information including the symbol information corresponding to the analyzed type of the stop symbol, the first fluctuation information corresponding to the analyzed content of the fluctuation mode, and the second fluctuation information corresponding to the analyzed content of the fluctuation pattern is generated. Then, the generated special symbol 2 reserved information is stored (saved) in the special symbol 2 reserved information storage area.
At this time, the priority of each storage area of the special drawing 2 reserved information storage area is specified to be storage area 1, storage area 2, storage area 3, and storage area 4 (highest to lowest) in order of priority. The generated special drawing 2 reserved information is stored in an empty storage area (the storage area with the highest priority among the empty storage areas) among storage areas 1 to 4.
In the following description, the reserved information (special drawing 1 reserved information or special drawing 2 reserved information) stored in the reserved information storage area in step S33-2 is referred to as "acquired reserved information." In addition, among the reserved information (special drawing 2 reserved information or special drawing 2 reserved information) stored in the reserved information storage area (special drawing 1 reserved information storage area or special drawing 2 reserved information storage area), the reserved information in which the notification display (variable display and stop display) is executed before the acquired reserved information is referred to as "preceding reserved information."

Here, when the storage area of each game information (special chart 1 game information or special chart 2 game information) is shifted in the game information storage area (special chart 1 game information storage area or special chart 2 game information storage area), the storage area of the reserved information (special chart 1 reserved information or special chart 2 reserved information) corresponding to that game information is shifted in the reserved information storage area (special chart 1 reserved information storage area or special chart 2 reserved information storage area).
In this embodiment, in response to receiving a specified control command (pattern type designation command, variation mode designation command, and variation pattern designation command), the storage area of each reserved information (special chart 1 reserved information or special chart 2 reserved information) is shifted in the reserved information storage area (special chart 1 reserved information storage area or special chart 2 reserved information storage area).
At this time, when a predetermined control command corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) is received, the memory area in which the special symbol 1 reserved information is stored is shifted in the special symbol 1 reserved information memory area. That is, first, the memory contents of memory area 1 are shifted (moved) to memory area 0. Next, the memory contents of memory area 2 are shifted to memory area 1. Next, the memory contents of memory area 3 are shifted to memory area 2. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 are shifted to memory area 3. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 are cleared (initialized).
On the other hand, when a predetermined control command corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information) is received, the memory area in which the special symbol 2 reserved information is stored is shifted in the special symbol 2 reserved information memory area. That is, first, the memory contents of memory area 1 are shifted (moved) to memory area 0. Next, the memory contents of memory area 2 are shifted to memory area 1. Next, the memory contents of memory area 3 are shifted to memory area 2. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 are shifted to memory area 3. Next, the memory contents of memory area 4 are cleared (initialized).

In addition, upon receipt of a demo designation command, the contents of memory area 0 of the reserved information memory area (special chart 1 reserved information memory area or special chart 2 reserved information memory area) are cleared (initialized).
At this time, if a demo designation command is received specifying that a customer waiting state has begun for the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information), the memory contents of memory area 0 in the special pattern 1 pending information memory area are cleared (initialized).
On the other hand, when a demo designation command is received specifying that a customer waiting state has begun for the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information), the memory contents of memory area 0 in the special pattern 1 pending information memory area are cleared (initialized).

In step S33-3, it is determined whether or not a pre-reading preview performance is being executed, and if it is determined that a pre-reading preview performance is not being executed (No), the process proceeds to step S33-4, and if it is determined that a pre-reading preview performance is being executed (Yes), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In this embodiment, while the pre-reading preview performance is being executed, "1" is set in the pre-reading preview performance flag area of the RAM of the performance control board 300. Therefore, in step S33-3, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading preview performance is being executed based on whether or not "1" is set in the pre-reading preview performance flag area of the RAM of the performance control board 300.
In step S33-4, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the pre-reading preview performance are met, and if it is determined that the conditions for executing the pre-reading preview performance are met (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-5, and if it is determined that the conditions for executing the pre-reading preview performance are not met (No), the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
In this embodiment, it is determined that the conditions for executing the pre-reading preview performance are met when all of the following conditions are met: (1) the acquired reserved information is special chart 2 reserved information; (2) a predetermined number (in this embodiment, "1") or more of advance reserved information is stored in the special chart 2 reserved information storage area; (3) there is no advance reserved information specifying a "jackpot pattern" in the special chart 2 reserved information storage area; (4) there is no advance reserved information specifying a fluctuation pattern number corresponding to a "normal reach fluctuation" or a "super reach fluctuation" in the special chart 2 reserved information storage area (all advance reserved information stored in the special chart 2 reserved information storage area specifies "indefinite value" as the fluctuation mode number/fluctuation pattern number); (5) a special chart high probability state is occurring; and (6) neither a jackpot game state nor a small win game state is occurring.
The contents of the pre-reading preview performance execution conditions can be changed as appropriate. In other words, it may be configured such that it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance execution conditions are met when one or more of the above conditions (1) to (6) are met, rather than when all of the above conditions (1) to (6) are met. In addition, the pre-reading preview performance execution conditions may include other conditions different from the above conditions (1) to (6).

In step S33-5, a pre-reading advance notice performance lottery process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S33-6. In the pre-reading advance notice performance lottery process, a pre-reading advance notice performance lottery is executed to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice performance.
The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores a pre-reading advance notice performance lottery table in which winning values of the pre-reading advance notice performance lottery are registered.
In the pre-reading advance notice performance lottery process, first, a pre-reading advance notice performance lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Then, based on the obtained pre-reading advance notice performance lottery random number and a pre-reading advance notice performance lottery table, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading advance notice performance.
In step S33-6, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading preview performance lottery executed in step S33-5 has been won. If it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance lottery has been won (Yes), the process proceeds to step S33-7. If it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance lottery has been lost (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5).
Here, if it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance lottery has been won, it is decided to execute a pre-reading preview performance (reserved preview performance) targeting the acquired reserved information.
In the following description, the acquired reserved information (special chart 2 reserved information) that is the target of the pre-reading preview performance is referred to as "pre-notification target reserved information." In addition, the reserved pattern h corresponding to the pre-notification target reserved information (pre-notification target game information) is referred to as "pre-notification target reserved pattern hy."
In addition, the special chart 2 game information that is the target of the pre-reading preview performance (the special chart 2 game information corresponding to the preview target hold information) is referred to as "pre-reading target game information." Furthermore, among the special chart 2 game information stored in the special chart 2 game information storage area, the special chart 2 game information in which the start determination is executed before the preview target game information is referred to as "preceding game information."

In step S33-7, a pre-reading advance notice effect setting process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-5). In the pre-reading advance notice effect setting process, the contents of the pre-reading advance notice effect (hold advance notice effect) are set.
Specifically, in the pre-reading preview performance setting process, first, a reserved final mode selection process is executed. In the reserved final mode selection process, a reserved final mode is selected and set.
The "final reserved state" is the state of the reserved pattern hy that is the final change target of the notice in the reserved notice performance.
The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores a reservation final mode selection table in which the correspondence between reservation final mode selection random numbers and reservation final modes is registered.
In addition, a reservation final mode selection table corresponding to each type of stopping pattern ("miss pattern", "small win pattern", or "big win pattern") is stored as a reservation final mode selection table.
In the reserved final mode selection process, first, a reserved final mode selection random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the type of the stop pattern specified by the obtained reserved information is confirmed, and the reserved final mode selection table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, based on the obtained reserved final mode selection random number and the read reserved final mode selection table, the reserved final mode is selected (determined).

In the pre-reading advance notice effect setting process, next, a scenario selection process is executed. In the scenario selection process, a scenario (data) for the reserved advance notice effect is selected and set.
The scenario for the hold notice performance is composed of information specifying one or more hold change triggers, and information specifying a hold change pattern corresponding to each hold change trigger.
The "reserved change trigger" is a trigger for changing the state of the reserved pattern hy that is the subject of the advance notice.
The "reserved change pattern" is one in which the appearance of the reserved pattern hy to be notified changes.
The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores a scenario selection table in which the correspondence between scenario selection random numbers and scenarios for the hold notice performance is registered.
In addition, as a scenario lottery table, a scenario lottery table corresponding to each combination of the reserved final mode and the reserved number of special chart 2 is stored.
In addition, in the scenario lottery table corresponding to each reserved final mode, a scenario in which the mode of the reserved pattern hy to be predicted finally changes to becomes the reserved final mode is registered.
Here, in each scenario, as a reserved change pattern corresponding to each reserved change trigger, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be the subject of notice after the change is stipulated to be a state with a higher probability of winning compared to the state of the reserved pattern hy to be the subject of notice before the change. As a result, during the execution of the reserved notice performance, the state of the reserved pattern hy to be the subject of notice changes to a state with a higher probability of winning.
In the scenario selection process, first, a scenario lottery random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. In addition, the reserved final mode selected in the reserved final mode selection process and the reserved number of special figures 2 are confirmed, and a scenario lottery table corresponding to this confirmation result is read out. Then, based on the obtained scenario lottery random number and the read scenario lottery table, a scenario for the reserved notice performance is determined (determined).
In the pre-reading notice performance setting process, next, "1" is set in the pre-reading notice performance flag area of the RAM of the performance control board 300. Also, the scenario of the reserved notice performance determined in the scenario selection process is set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the performance control board 300. As a result, the reserved notice performance is executed according to the set scenario.
In addition, by processing not shown, ``0'' is set in the pre-reading preview performance flag area of the RAM of the performance control board 300 in response to the end of the pending preview performance (end of the notification display based on the game information to be previewed).

(Variation command reception process)
Next, the variable command receiving process in step S32-5 will be described.
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the variable command receiving process.
When the variable command receiving process is executed in step S32-5, the process proceeds to step S34-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S34-1, it is determined whether or not a specified control command has been received. If it is determined that the specified control command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S34-2. If it is determined that the specified control command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6).
Here, the predetermined control commands refer to a symbol type designation command, a variation mode designation command, and a variation pattern designation command.
In step S34-2, a stop effect determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-3. In the stop effect determination process, a stop effect number (a mode of the stop effect) is determined.
Specifically, in the stop effect determination process, a stop effect number (a mode of the stop effect) is determined based on the type of the stop pattern specified by the pattern type designation command. The determined stop effect number is then stored in a stop effect number storage area of the RAM of the effect control board 300. At this time, if a pattern type designation command corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information) is received, the determined stop effect number is stored in a stop effect number storage area corresponding to the first special pattern (special pattern 1 game information). On the other hand, if a pattern type designation command corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information) is received, the determined stop effect number is stored in a stop effect number storage area corresponding to the second special pattern (special pattern 2 game information).

In step S34-3, a variable performance determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-4. In the variable performance determination process, a variable performance number (a mode of the variable performance) is determined.
Specifically, in the variable performance determination process, first, a first half variable performance determination process is executed to determine a first half variable performance number (aspect of the first half variable performance).
The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores a first half variable performance lottery table in which the correspondence between the variable mode number (type of variable mode) and the first half variable performance number (form of first half variable performance) is registered.
In the first half variable performance determination process, first, a first half variable performance selection table is read. Then, a first half variable performance number corresponding to the variable mode number designated by the variable mode designation command is determined (selected) from among the first half variable performance numbers registered in the first half variable performance selection table.

In the variable performance determination process, next, a second half variable performance determination process is executed to determine a second half variable performance number (a mode of the second half variable performance).
The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores a second half variable performance lottery table in which the correspondence between the variable pattern number (type of variable pattern) and the second half variable performance number (mode of second half variable performance) is registered.
In the latter half variable performance determination process, first, a latter half variable performance selection table is read out. Then, a latter half variable performance number corresponding to the variable pattern number designated by the variable pattern designation command is determined (selected) from the latter half variable performance numbers registered in the latter half variable performance selection table.

In step S34-4, a preview performance determination process is executed, and the process proceeds to step S34-5. In the preview performance determination process, a main preview performance number (the mode of the main preview performance) is selected.
The ROM of the performance control board 300 stores a preview performance lottery table in which the correspondence between preview performance lottery random numbers and main preview performance numbers (modes of main preview performance) is registered.
In addition, as a preview performance lottery table, a preview performance lottery table corresponding to each stopping pattern number (each type of stopping pattern) is stored.
To determine the mode of the main preview performance, first, a preview performance selection random number is obtained from a predetermined random number counter. Then, the stop symbol number specified by the stop symbol designation command is confirmed, and the preview performance selection table corresponding to this confirmation result is read. Then, the main preview performance number is determined (determined) based on the obtained preview performance selection random number and the read preview performance selection table.

In step S34-5, a variable performance setting process is executed, and the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-6). In the variable performance setting process, a performance control table for the variable performance is set.
Specifically, in the variable performance setting process, the performance control table corresponding to the first half variable performance number determined in step S34-3 and the performance control table corresponding to the second half variable performance number determined in step S34-3 are read out.
Next, the read-out performance control tables are synthesized to generate a performance control table related to the variable performance. Then, the generated performance control table is set in a performance control table setting area of the RAM of the performance control board 300.
At this time, when a symbol type designation command corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) is received, the generated effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information). This starts a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbols z1 and z2) in the effect symbol display area A.
On the other hand, when a symbol type designation command corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information) is received, the generated effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information). This starts a variable effect (variable display of the effect symbols z1 and z2) in the effect symbol display area B.
Also, the control table corresponding to the main preview performance number determined in step S34-4 is read out. Then, the read out control table is set in the control table setting area of the RAM of the control board 300. This causes the main preview performance to start at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variable performance.

(Stop command reception process)
Next, the stop command reception process in step S32-6 will be described.
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the stop command reception process.
When the stop command reception process is executed in step S32-6, the process proceeds to step S35-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S35-1, it is determined whether or not a stop command has been received. If it is determined that a stop command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S35-2. If it is determined that a stop command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7).
In step S35-2, a stop effect setting process is executed, and the series of processes is terminated and the process proceeds to the next process (step S32-7). In the stop effect setting process, a stop effect control table is set.
Specifically, in the stop effect setting process, when a stop designation command corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) is received, the stop effect number stored in the stop effect number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information) is acquired, and the effect control table corresponding to the acquired stop effect number is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area corresponding to the first special symbol (special symbol 1 game information). This starts the stop effect (stop display of the effect symbols z1 and z2) in the effect symbol display area A.
On the other hand, in the stop effect setting process, when a stop designation command corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information) is received, the stop effect number stored in the stop effect number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information) is acquired, and the effect control table corresponding to the acquired stop effect number is read. Then, the read effect control table is set in the effect control table setting area corresponding to the second special symbol (special symbol 2 game information). As a result, the stop effect (stop display of the effect symbols z1 and z2) is started in the effect symbol display area B.

(Opening command reception process)
Next, the opening command receiving process in step S32-7 will be described.
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the opening command receiving process.
When the opening command reception process is executed in step S32-7, the process proceeds to step S39-1 as shown in FIG.
In step S39-1, it is determined whether or not an opening designation command has been received. If it is determined that an opening designation command has been received (Yes), the process proceeds to step S39-2. If it is determined that an opening designation command has not been received (No), the process ends and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4).
In step S39-2, a winning effect setting process is executed, and the series of processes is ended and the process proceeds to the next process (step S31-4). In the winning effect setting process, a performance control table for the winning effect is set.
Specifically, in the winning effect setting process, a performance control table corresponding to the type of the stop symbol specified by the opening designation command is read out. Then, the read out performance control table is set in the performance control table setting area of the RAM of the performance control board 300. This starts the winning effect.

(Function of Pachinko Machine 1)
The pachinko machine 1 includes an outer rail 530 that guides game balls, and a rail base 520 that supports the outer rail 530. The rail base 520 is a molded product. The outer rail 530 is supported by a guide surface 521 of the rail base 520. The pin marks PS of the extrusion pin are arranged at a position that avoids the guide surface 521. That is, in the pachinko machine 1, the pin marks PS are not arranged on the guide surface 521 that supports the outer rail 530. This makes it possible to prevent the pin marks PS arranged on the rail base 520 from interfering with the outer rail 530.
In particular, in the pachinko machine 1, the pin marks PS are arranged on the front surface of the rail base member 520. This makes it possible to prevent the pin marks PS arranged on the rail base 520 from interfering with the front surface of the game board 11.

(Modification)
Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, various modifications can be made to the above embodiment.
For example, the above embodiment shows an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine 1. However, the present invention may be applied to other gaming machines as long as the gaming machine includes a molded product. For example, the present invention may be applied to a pachinko slot machine (in a pachinko slot machine, the gaming medium is a medal) or the like.

REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 1 Pachinko machine 200 Main control board 300 Performance control board 440 Game ball payout device 460 Base member 470 Cover member 471 Front plate 520 Rail base 521 Guide surface 530 Outer rail 700 Decorative member 710 Front plate 720 Outer peripheral plate w1 Outer peripheral wall w2 Partition wall w3 Rib PS Pin mark

Claims (1)

A rail for guiding the game ball;
A base member supporting the rail,
the base member is a molded article,
The rail is supported by a guide surface of the base member,
A gaming machine characterized in that a pin mark of an ejector pin is arranged inside a recess provided at a position away from the guide surface.

Images